Skip to main content

Full text of "The Art of Community"

See other formats


By  Spencer  H/N|ttCalluiii 


401 


THE  ART  OF  COMMUNITY 


.  ^  <k  ^- 


THE  ART  OF  COMMUNITY 


by 

Spencer  Heath  MacCallum 


Institute  for  Humane  Studies,  Inc. 
Menlo  Park,  California 


Propiedad  de  la  Eiblioteca 
UiilVHiiSlDAD  FRANCISCO  »1ARR0QUIN 


The  INSTITUTE  FOR  HUMANE  STUDIES  was  founded  in  1961  as  an 
independent  center  to  encourage  basic  research  and  advanced  study  for  the 
strengthening  of  a  free  society.  Through  seminars,  fellowships,  publications, 
and  other  activities,  the  Institute  seeks  to  serve  a  worldwide  community  of 
scholars  in  education,  business,  and  the  professions  who  are  interested  in 
broadening  the  knowledge  and  practice  of  the  principles  of  liberty. 


Copyright  ©  1970  by 
Institute  for  Humane  Studies  Inc. 
Library  of  Congress  Catalog  Card  Number:  78-1 12866 
Printed  in  the  United  States  of  America 


This  book  acknowledges  the  transcendent  dream 

and  yet  practical  temper  of 
Spencer  Heath,  F.  A.  Harper,  and  Alvin  Lowi,  Jr. 


Foreword 


Most  of  us  see  major  changes  in  society  only  after  they  have  come  to 
pass.  We  experience  the  change  but  without  conceiving  of  it  in  advance, 
and  so  we  do  httle  or  nothing  to  help  forward  it.  Spencer  MacCallum's 
distinguished  grandfather  once  described  the  situation  this  way:  "If  you 
wait  to  act  until  it  is  perfectly  safe  to  do  so,  you  will  be  too  late  for  the 
opportunity  at  hand." 

A  book  comes  along  occasionally  that  is  "before  its  time."  This  means 
that  it  will  be  read  and  used  primarily  by  a  few  who  can  envisage 
important  things  that  are  to  come— once  the  idea  is  grasped  and 
implemented.  The  Art  of  Community  is  that  kind  of  book. 

It  is  commonly  implied  or  asserted  outright  that  an  expanding 
population  necessitates  increases  in  the  size  of  formal  organizations  in 
society  and,  correspondingly,  increases  in  the  use  of  force  to  restrict 
liberty  among  persons.  With  these  assumptions,  men  have  accepted  more 
and  more  enslavement  as  the  necessary  cost  of  fecundity.  Through  the 
centuries  they  have  developed  and  accepted  all  sorts  of  illiberal  devices 
for  "social  control,"  usually  justified  on  grounds  of  securing  law  and 
order. 

As  a  setting  for  reading  this  book,  one  may  recall  the  customary 
outlines  of  societal  forms  which  the  sociologists  are  fond  of  listing.  The 
"community"  problem  began  when  Adam,  with  his  rib,  added  the  second 
person  to  his  environment.  As  conflicting  interests  arose  and  bumped 
into  each  other  more  and  more,  we  are  told  that  there  developed  these 
societal  arrangements  in  a  general  sequence:  (1)  families,  (2)  clans,  (3) 
tribes,  (4)  nations,  and  (5)  super-nations. 

Against  his  own  background  of  studies  in  social  anthropology,  Mr. 
MacCallum  challenges  many  traditional  assumptions  and  presents  a 
specific  alternative  grounded  in  both  theory  and  practice.  He  foresees  a 
radically  new  form  of  society— new,  at  least,  in  the  conceptual  scope 
which  he  outlines.  It  is  a  society  of  individual  contracts— one  that 
transcends  all  geographical  barriers  to  human  relationships  as  well  as  the 
shackles  of  prenatally  determined  bondage  that  we  are  fond  of  calling 
citizenship.  In  an  open  society  of  contract,  a  person  may  deal  with 
whomever  he  chooses,  relative  to  that  which  is  his.  Any  two  parties,  near 
or  far,  may  contract  with  one  another  and  do  business  on  mutually 
desired  terms.  The  author  explains  how  such  a  society  is  evolving  as 
individuals  begin  to  perceive  the  method  and  put  it  into  operation.  Here 
is  a  solution  to  the  intrinsic  violence  of  political  power! 

vii 


viii 

Mr.  MacCallum  has  offered  us  an  excellent  bridge  from  the  frontiers 
of  social  theory  to  the  specific  practices  that  produce  social  harmony.  He 
avoids  the  common  danger  that  such  an  attempt  will  become  either  an 
impractical  dream  or  only  an  unimaginative  cataloguing  of  minutiae. 
The  construct  he  lays  before  us  preserves  private  ownership  and  control 
of  property  while  establishing  a  method  to  provide  desirable  services 
generally  preempted  by  the  State.  He  shows  how  we  are  already  weaning 
ourselves— often  unconsciously— away  from  the  political  regimentation 
of  life,  as  well  as  from  other  forms  of  control  based  on  coercion,  without 
leaving  any  vacuum  of  necessary  functions  to  be  performed. 

The  central  concept  of  this  book  has  endured  all  the  growing  pains 
which  revolutionary  ideas  must  undergo.  It  was  tested  and  refined  by 
exposure  in  earlier  years,  mostly  through  discussions  which  the  author 
had  with  his  friends.  In  recent  years  the  refined  idea  has  begun  to 
command  increasing  attention  as  more  and  more  "free  communities" 
spring  up  both  here  and  abroad.  It  seems  timely,  therefore,  to  publish 
this  work  and  help  along  a  concept  which  Harvard  University's  famous 
Dean,  Roscoe  Pound,  once  praised  as  an  "outstanding  contribution  to  a 
crucial  problem  of  our  time." 

The  author,  like  many  of  us  who  knew  him,  is  anxious  to  give  full  credit 
to  his  grandfather,  Spencer  Heath,  whose  inspiration  and  intellect 
contributed  much  to  making  this  book  possible.  Mr.  Heath  (1876—1963) 
was  one  of  the  truly  remarkable  men  of  our  time.  Most  persons  knew  him 
as  an  engineer,  an  attorney,  a  manufacturer,  or  a  horticulturist;  but  his 
friends  knew  him  also  as  a  genial  conversationalist  and  considered  him 
the  keenest  philosopher  of  freedom  they  had  ever  met. 

Mr.  MacCallum  also  acknowledges  his  indebtedness  to  many  other 
persons  who,  in  various  important  ways,  helped  shape  the  ideas  in  this 
book.  But  for  the  encouragement  of  Dr.  James  B.  Watson  of  the 
Department  of  Anthropology,  University  of  Washington,  this  study 
might  not  have  been  undertaken.  Alvin  Lowi,  Jr.,  deserves  credit  for  the 
title,  The  Art  of  Community.  A  special  note  of  thanks  is  due  to  Sartell 
Prentice,  Jr.,  of  Pasadena,  who  was  the  final  catalyst  in  this  publication. 


F.  A.  Harper 


Author's  Preface 


The  concept  of  proprietary  community  administration  which  is  pivotal 
to  much  of  this  book  was  original  to  my  grandfather,  Spencer  Heath,  and 
was  a  principal  theme  of  his  final  and  major  work.  Citadel,  Market  and 
Altar  (1957).  It  has  been  my  privilege  to  make  use  of  many  of  the  ideas 
which  he  expressed  in  more  general  and  philosophic  form.  In  my  studies 
in  anthropology  I  tested  and  extended  some  of  them  specifically  to 
primitive  village  organization,  on  the  one  hand,  and  to  current  develop- 
ments in  real  estate— contemporary  land  tenure— on  the  other. 

During  periods  of  social  evolution  like  the  present,  forms  and 
practices  change  rapidly.  Specific  facts  and  illustrations  soon  become 
out-of-date,  as  may  already  be  the  case  in  some  instances  in  this  book 
for  which  the  work  extends  back  over  a  decade.  Essential  principles  of 
human  association  do  not  change,  however,  and  the  reader  is  invited  to 
give  these  his  attention.  By  progressively  understanding  the  'timeless 
aspect,'  our  creative  command  grows. 

In  a  field  in  which  the  relevant  literature  is  still  so  little  established  as 
in  the  social  sciences,  the  amateur  with  scientific  curiosity  and  sound 
intuition  suffers  no  great  disadvantage.  It  is  hoped,  therefore,  that  the 
present  work  will  provide  a  stimulus  to  investigative  thinking  among 
informed  readers  outside  of  the  established  social  sciences  no  less  than 
within. 

Spencer  Heath  MacCallum 

San  Pedro,  California 
May,  1970 


ix 


CONTENTS 

Page 


Foreword  vii 

Author's  Preface  ix 
Chapter 

1  IS  THE  HOTEL  A  COMMUNITY?  1 

2  HISTORICAL  BRIEFS  7 

From  Inns  to  Hotels  7 

Shopping  Centers  15 

Industrial  Estates  21 

Mobile  Home  Parks  28 

Some  Other  Forms  33 

Conclusions  34 

3  TRENDS  IN  THE  REAL  ESTATE  INDUSTRY  39 

4  NARROWING  THE  FIELD  OF  COMMUNITY 
TYPES  49 

5  STRUCTURE  AND  FUNCTION  55 

The  Pattern  of  Subdivision  55 

The  Economy  of  the  Proprietary  Community  59 

Role  of  the  Community  Owner  63 

6  COMPARISONS  WITH  PRIMITIVE  COMMUNITY  68 

7  THE  NATURE  OF  COMMUNITY  ORGANIZATION  75 

The  Proprietary  Principle  76 

Volunteer  Association  79 

What  is  Sovereignty?  85 

Kinship  92 

8  EVOLVING  SOCIETY  95 

Notes  107 

Index  113 


X 


CHAPTER  1 


Is  the  Hotel  a  Community? 

At  a  time  when  we  have  entered  the  moon  age,  our  communities  on 
earth  are  deteriorating  faster  than  we  can  maintain  them  or  escape  from 
them.  The  administrators  of  our  communities  are  engaged  in  death 
struggles  with  one  another,  drafting  the  occupants  to  do  the  fighting  and 
the  dying,  to  the  music  and  under  the  banners  of  the  greater  pubUc 
welfare.  This  picture  starkly  portrays  the  failure  of  our  social  sciences. 
The  failure  is  only  underscored  by  the  spectacular  successes  in  the 
natural  sciences. 

Of  the  two  main  streams  of  social  science  effort,  sociology  and  social 
anthropology,  the  sociologists  have  concerned  themselves  historically 
with  what  might  be  called  clinical  sociology,  much  as  psychologists  from 
the  time  of  Freud  until  quite  recently  have  concentrated  on  clinical 
psychology.  Sociologists  have  dealt  more  with  the  ills  and  problems  of 
society  than  with  its  healthy  functioning.  Within  their  chosen  field  of 
Western  society,  the  very  communities  available  for  study  have  been 
defective  models  of  community  functioning.  Their  pathology  will  be 
explained  in  the  course  of  this  book.  Social  anthropologists,  on  the  other 
hand,  have  encountered  much  healthy  functioning  in  the  communities  of 
the  primitive  world.  Yet,  because  of  the  enormous  variety  of  social  forms 
and  cultures,  they  have  been  wholly  occupied  in  collecting  and  ordering 
their  data  and  have  seen  nothing  to  bridge  to,  have  made  no  translations 
or  practical  applications  from  primitive  to  modern  society.  Thus  in  the 
social  sciences  there  have  been  as  yet  none  of  the  over-all  integrations 
and  simplifications  that  have  characterized  the  advances  in  the  natural 
sciences. 

Recently,  however,  an  interesting  development  has  occurred  which 
parallels  in  some  respects  the  history  of  the  natural  sciences.  In  the 
Middle  Ages,  before  there  was  any  science  of  chemistry  or  physics,  there 
was  nevertheless  some  very  successful  empirical  chemistry  and  physics  in 
the  arts  of  tanning  and  dyeing  and  metallurgy.  In  a  like  way,  an 
empirical  art  of  community  has  developed  within  Western  society  since 
mid-century,  in  a  span  of  barely  twenty  years.  It  has  appeared  in  the  real- 
estate  field,  outside  of  the  cognizance  of  the  social  sciences  and  without 
appreciation  of  its  significance  within  the  real-estate  industry.  Rudimen- 
tary as  it  yet  is,  this  empirical  art  may  provide  models  of  healthy  social 
functioning  from  which  to  infer  much  more  than  we  know  of  the 


2 


The  Art  of  Community 


structure  and  function  of  communities  and  so  move  us  closer  to  an 
authentic  natural  science  of  society. 

The  task  of  this  book  is  to  explore  this  growing  art  of  community  and 
some  of  its  implications.  An  effective  starting  place  is  suggested  by  the 
aphorism  that  all  new  understanding  begins  with  a  question.  In  this  case 
the  line  of  inquiry  actually  did  begin  with  a  specific  question  that  took 
shape  with  great  clarity  in  the  writer's  mind  in  the  early  spring  of  1959. 
The  question  was  whether  the  hotel  should  not,  in  point  of  fact,  be 
considered  a  community  and  as  valid  an  object  of  scientific  study  in 
terms  of  structure  and  function  as  the  communities  of  the  Cherokee,  the 
Mambwe,  or  the  Trukese,  with  which  anthropologists  are  regularly 
concerned,  or  as  the  communities  of  peasant  and  modern  society. 

True,  there  is  little  continuing  personal  contact  among  hotel  guests,  but 
the  transient  and  impersonal  quahty  of  the  hotel  does  not  differ  in 
principle  from  that  of  modern  cities  and  towns  which  are  readily 
acknowledged  as  communities.  The  physical  analogy,  moreover,  is 
striking.  The  hotel  has  its  public  and  private  areas,  corridors  for  streets, 
and  a  lobby  for  its  town  square.  In  the  lobby  is  the  municipal  park  with 
its  sculpture,  fountains,  and  plantings.  It  has  its  shopping  area,  where 
restaurants  and  retail  stores  bid  for  patronage.  Its  public  transit  system, 
as  it  happens,  operates  vertically  instead  of  horizontally. 

Utilities,  including  power  and  water  service  and  sewerage,  are  all 
available.  Police  and  fire  protection  come  under  the  supervision  of  the 
house  officer  and  security  staff.  Some  hotels  provide  chapels,  sponsor 
concerts  and  lectures,  give  adult  instruction  of  various  kinds,  and  conduct 
nursery  schools.  Controlled  lighting  and  climate  and  community-wide 
credit  arrangements  number  among  the  services  and  amenities  which  are 
available  only  on  the  most  rudimentary  level  in  our  out-of-doors 
communities,  yet  which  are  accepted  as  a  matter  of  course  in  hotels. 

The  question  gains  an  element  of  interest  in  connection  with  the 
organization  of  the  hotel,  for  social  scientists  commonly  suggest  only 
three  possible  bases  of  community  organization,  none  of  which  applies  to 
a  hotel.  The  suggested  bases  are  kinship,  recorded  by  anthropologists  for 
many  primitive  communities;  common  dedication  to  an  ideal  or  purpose, 
especially  associated  with  religious  communes;  and  sovereignty,  with 
which  we  are  sufficiently  familiar.  The  fragmented,  transient  character 
of  the  guest  population  of  a  hotel  precludes  the  formation  of  either 
kinship  ties  or  strong  personal  bonds  or  commitments.  As  for  sover- 
eignty, where  is  the  taxation  legislated  and  levied  on  the  guests  to  finance 
the  common  services?  The  authority  of  the  management  is  proprietary 
only  and,  as  such,  does  not  extend  to  the  persons  or  property  of  the 


Is  the  Hotel  a  Community? 


3 


guests,  who  individually  negotiate  with  the  management  the  amount  and 
method  of  payment  and  the  services  to  be  rendered  in  return. 

The  hotel,  if  considered  to  be  a  community,  has  some  further  interest- 
ing attributes.  It  is  a  product  of  urban  society  and  shares  the  impersonal 
quality  of  the  city;  but  its  scale  is  small,  it  is  clearly  bounded,  and  it  lacks 
sovereignty,  in  common  with  a  great  many  village  communities.  Thus  it 
tends  to  bridge— if  it  does  not  fall  into— the  gap  between  sociology  and 
anthropology. 

By  now  the  question  has  become  more  than  a  play  on  the  meanings  of 
a  word.  It  demands  a  considered  answer,  and  the  answer  turns  precisely 
on  the  definition  of  community.  The  notion  of  community  has  long 
haunted  the  thoughts  of  social  scientists  as  a  possible  key  to  a  unit  of 
social  analysis  that  could  be  employed  cross-culturally.  Yet  the  concept 
has  been  elusive.  Seldom  is  more  rigor  attempted  than  to  say  that  a 
community  consists  of  persons  in  social  interaction  within  a  geographical 
area  and  having  one  or  more  additional  common  ties.  This  was  the 
synthetic  definition  offered  in  1955  by  sociologist  George  Hillery,  who 
collected  ninety-four  definitions  of  the  word  and  made  a  statistical 
analysis  of  their  content. '  The  word  is  also  used  figuratively,  as  when  one 
speaks  of  a  "community  of  interest"  or  of  a  group  of  people  who  share  a 
common  origin  or  likeness,  as  the  Italian  community  in  America. 

Critical  study  of  the  hotel  as  a  community,  however,  presented  many 
fresh  aspects  of  the  subject  and  suggested  a  definition  that  is  cross- 
culturally  valid  and  has  at  the  same  time  enough  rigor  to  be  a  fruitful 
analytic  tool.  In  this  book,  therefore,  community  will  be  defined  as  an 
occupation  by  two  or  more  persons  of  a  place  divided  into  private  and 
common  areas  according  to  a  system  of  relations  which  defines  and  allocates 
responsibility  for  the  performance  of  all  activities  that  might  be  required  for 
its  continuity.*  Upkeep  of  the  common  area  and  its  facilities,  selection  of 
members,  and  leadership  are  prominent  examples  of  these  required 
activities  or  tasks. 

This  definition  has  some  surprising  empirical  consequences.  It  identi- 
fies, in  addition  to  what  traditionally  have  been  called  communities,  a 
variety  of  phenomena  not  customarily  thought  of  in  that  way.  One,  of 

*Close  personal  ties  are  not  a  requirement  of  the  definition,  but  neither  are  they  excluded 
by  it.  A  community  frequently  provides  the  context,  or  the  setting,  for  such  ties.  Common 
usage  is  not  analytical,  however,  and  does  not  distinguish  the  two.  Sociologist  Conrad 
Arensberg  writes  to  the  point:  "The  semantic  confusion  between  community  as  organization 
and  'community'  as  an  individual's  maximum  range  of  face-to-face  acquaintance,  which 
continues  to  appear  in  the  literature  of  anthropology  and  social  psychology,  is  a  crippling 
failure  of  sociological  sense.  It  is  in  fact  as  if  a  zoologist  should  require  of  a  beehive  that  it  not 
be  one  unless  he  knew  every  bee  to  brush  wings  with  every  other  bee.  "  ^ 


4 


The  Art  of  Community 


course,  is  the  hotel.  An  office  building  in  the  daytime  is  also  a  community 
by  this  definition;  so  is  a  theater  during  a  performance,  at  which  time  the 
seats  are  held  privately,  the  aisles  are  used  in  common,  and  the  chief 
public  service  is  entertainment.  An  apartment  house  and  a  trailer  camp 
also  qualify.  Even  a  restaurant  qualifies;  the  tables  and  booths  are  the 
restricted  areas,  and  the  music,  decor,  and  availablity  of  food  figure 
prominently  as  common  services.  A  private  home,  when  more  than  one 
of  the  family  is  in  residence,  is  a  community.  Airplanes,  ships,  and  trains 
in  transit  meet  the  requirements  of  the  definition. 

Clearly  this  definition  describes  not  an  unchanging  entity  but,  like 
anything  we  may  describe  in  the  world  around  us,  a  conflux  of  condi- 
tions, an  event  of  which  permanence  is  not  a  requirement.  It  has 
reference  to  many  diverse  kinds  of  situations,  but  within  those  situations 
it  always  denotes  a  certain  set  of  conditions.  The  variables  include 
considerations  of  place,  population,  arrangement  of  internal  space,  kinds 
of  public  service  available,  and  arrangements  for  securing  performance 
of  these  services. 

The  function  of  a  community  within  a  larger  community  may  also  be  a 
significant  variable,  for  normally  we  live  in  communities  within  commu- 
nities—a booth  within  a  restaurant  within  a  building  within  a  shopping 
center  within  a  town.  In  contemporary  society,  a  person  seldom  finds 
himself  in  only  one  community  at  one  time.  He  passes  from  one 
community  to  another  a  number  of  times  during  a  day,  occupying  several 
simultaneously  on  successive  levels  whose  bounds  usually  can  be  de- 
scribed with  great  clarity. 

If  the  hotel  is  really  a  community,  then  is  there  a  principle  on  which  it 
is  organized  as  such?  What  are  the  social  bonds  that  hold  it  together?  The 
answer  is  basically  that  the  hotel  is  a  community  organized  by  contract. 
But  to  give  it  a  name  is  not  to  answer  the  question.  It  merely  opens  the 
door  to  the  inquiry.  How  the  hotel  is  organized  by  contract  will  be  dealt 
with  in  later  chapters. 

The  elaboration  of  business  contract  is  a  prominent  and  historically 
recent  development  of  Western  civilization.  It  has  assumed  major 
importance  within  the  last  two  centuries  as  a  way  of  relating  impersonally 
to  others  to  accomplish  personal  wants  by  exchange  of  services. 

Contract  is  commonly  thought  of  as  a  relation  between  two  individuals 
only;  seldom  is  it  considered  in  a  collective  or  community  context  except 
figuratively,  as  in  the  political  sense  of  Rousseau.* 

*Against  the  prevailing  ignorance  of  contract  among  most  anthropologists  and  sociolo- 
gists, it  is  interesting  to  observe  that  the  British  anthropologist,  A.  R.  Radcliffe-Brown,  wrote 
at  one  point,  "I  am  proposing  later  to  consider  economic  behavior  as  the  conceivable  unit 
behavior  of  a  social  science." 


Is  the  Hotel  a  Community? 


5 


Contract  has  proved  to  be  an  extremely  productive  technique  for 
individuals  to  employ  in  meeting  such  needs  as  food  and  clothing.  But 
when  men  think  of  providing  environmental  needs  such  as  streets,  parks, 
and  civic  planning— needs  they  cannot  enjoy  separately  but  must  share  in 
common— they  habitually  look  to  other  means.  The  hotel  proves  to  be  an 
exception.  Here  is  an  example  of  contract  operating  effectively  in  a 
collective— a  community— context. 

Contract  is  the  universal  bond  in  hotel  organization.  Not  only  every 
member  of  the  service  staff,  but  every  guest  is  related  to  the  whole 
organization  through  its  proprietors  by  contract.  The  manner  of  the 
relationship  of  each  toward  others  is  specified  in  the  terms  of  the 
individual  contracts,  the  sum  of  which  at  any  time  is  the  social  charter  or 
constitution  of  the  community. 

It  would  be  appropriate  to  call  the  hotel  a  proprietary  community,  since 
it  is  a  proprietary  enterprise  and  the  relations  of  every  member  of  the 
community  are  formed  directly  with  the  proprietary  authority.  The  terms 
of  each  contract,  however,  define  the  relations  of  each  individual  to  every 
other  person  in  the  community— the  least  obvious  relationship  being  that 
between  one  guest  and  another,  since  the  special  character  of  the  hotel 
requires  that  these  relations  be  in  the  nature  of  what  in  anthropology  are 
called  avoidance,  or  respect,  relations.  It  is  the  nature  of  contracts  that 
their  full  terms  are  seldom,  if  ever,  spelled  out  in  writing.  That  would  be 
cumbersome.  A  contract  is  nothing  more  than  an  agreement,  a  meeting 
of  minds,  and  it  is  enough  for  such  a  purpose  that  much  of  it  be 
unwritten.  This  is  particularly  true  of  hotel  guest  contracts,  since  these 
are  usually  short-term  and  highly  standardized.  Certain  conventions  of 
behavior  required  in  the  hotel  are  no  less  contractual  for  not  being 
written. 

However  strange  it  may  seem  on  first  reflection,  the  hotel  fulfills  the 
basic  criteria  for  a  community.  Moreover,  it  is  saved  from  being  an 
intellectual  curiosity,  an  oddity  of  evolution  or  of  semantics,  by  being  in 
such  large  and  vitally  growing  company.  All  multiple-occupancy  income 
properties  in  real  estate  qualify  as  one  or  another  form  of  proprietary 
community. 

The  next  two  chapters  provide  some  historical  perspective  from  which 
to  examine  the  nature  and  potential  of  the  proprietary  community. 


CHAPTER  2 


Historical  Briefs 

Research  into  the  nature  of  community  hfe  and  organization  tradi- 
tionally has  dealt  with  generalized  or  all-purpose  communities.  Proprie- 
tary communities  have  not  had  the  benefit  of  such  study,  partly  because 
they  are  recent  but  also  because  they  comprise  a  broad  class  of  special 
purpose  communities  which  lie  outside  the  traditional  scope  of  commu- 
nity studies. 

Proprietary  communities  are  usually  committed  to  special  phases  of 
economic  activity.  Each  of  the  functional  divisions  of  the  economy- 
production,  exchange,  and  consumption— has  evolved  its  own  specialized 
forms:  loft  buildings  and  industrial  parks  to  manufacturing,  mart 
buildings  and  shopping  centers  to  exchange,  and  hotels  and  rental 
housing  developments  to  residential  uses.  Thus,  proprietary  communities 
may  be  broadly  classified  according  to  purpose.  Each  form  has  developed 
in  its  field  independently  of  the  basically  similar  developments  occurring 
in  other  fields.  It  remained  for  property  managers,  the  newest  branch  of 
real  estate,  to  begin  in  a  pragmatic  way  the  conceptual  task  of  unifying 
the  field. 

The  classification  of  a  proprietary  community  according  to  its  charac- 
teristic activity  has  limited  utility,  however,  for  each  displays  a  generaliz- 
ing trend  away  from  its  original  special-purpose  character.  Increasingly, 
shopping  centers  which  include  oflfice  buildings,  hotel  facilities,  and 
medical  centers  have  become  the  commercial  and  cultural  focal  points  of 
suburbia.  Industrial  park  developers  are  providing  scientific  research 
facilities,  professional  buildings,  shopping  areas,  and  recreational 
centers.  There  has  also  been  a  rapid  rise  in  the  number  of  planned  real- 
estate  complexes  that  include  all  or  various  combinations  of  these 
functions  in  one  scheme  of  development. 

Because  little  information  is  available  on  proprietary  communities 
outside  of  articles  in  the  technical  and  trade  media,  most  people  have 
only  vague  impressions  of  their  history.  This  chapter  summarizes  the 
development  of  four  outstanding  forms  of  proprietary  community:  the 
hotel,  the  shopping  center,  the  industrial  estate,  and  the  mobile-home 
park. 

From  Inns  to  Hotels 

The  public  hotel,  as  a  commercial  venture  entered  upon  for  profit,  is 
the  oldest  of  the  modern  forms  of  proprietary  community.  But  it  is  a  far 


8 


The  Art  of  Community 


younger  institution  than  most  people  suppose.  From  classical  antiquity 
until  the  industrial  change  in  eighteenth-century  England,  there  did  exist 
public  inns  managed  for  profit.  But  these  were  less  than  simply  scaled- 
down  models  of  hotels  as  we  know  them.  Not  only  was  the  hotel  concept 
of  "service  to  the  public"  as  a  matter  of  deliberate  policy  unknown,  but 
the  public  inn  had  none  of  the  social  prestige  the  hotel  has  enjoyed  in 
recent  times.  Its  nearest  equivalent  in  today's  society  is  the  Skid  Row 
dormitory,  for  it  largely  housed  society's  castoffs,  criminals,  and  the  poor. 
Nor  does  there  seem  to  have  been  any  better  class  of  inns  to  balance  the 
picture,  notwithstanding  the  importance  of  travel  in  every  historical 
period.  There  were  other  ways  of  providing  accommodations,  and 
worthy  people  stopped  at  inns  only  when  compelled  by  unfortunate 
circumstances. 

In  the  Mediterranean  world,  the  rules  of  hospitality  strongly  prevailed. 
A  traveler  stayed  with  family  members,  acquaintances,  or  the  families  of 
professional  and  business  associates,  carrying  letters  or  word  of  introduc- 
tion in  places  where  he  was  not  known.  Societies  and  brotherhoods 
accommodated  their  own,  while  cities  and  states  provided  hospitality  for 
visitors  on  official  business  and  sometimes  maintained  special  post 
stations  for  the  use  of  their  own  couriers  and  emissaries  en  route. 
Temples  provided  lodging  for  pilgrims  and  travelers.  Later,  during  the 
Middle  Ages,  nobles  accommodated  travelers  in  their-  town  houses  and 
country  estates.  Religious  orders,  both  Moslem  and  Christian,  cared  for 
travelers.  Merchant  and  craft  guilds  provided  accommodations  for  their 
own  traveling  members. 

The  traveler  to  a  city  who  stayed  at  a  public  inn  was  one  who  had  no 
family  or  other  connections  in  the  city  and  presumably  no  legitimate 
business  there.  As  such,  he  was  widely  suspect.  Marco  Polo  reports  that 
the  use  of  the  guest  register  by  innkeepers  in  Chinese  cities  was  a 
requirement  of  law,  a  police  measure  to  monitor  the  movements  of  aliens 
and  unknown  persons.  It  was  also  for  the  protection  of  such  persons,  for 
the  traveler  without  kin  or  connections  was  the  natural  prey  of  criminals. 
This  was  another  reason  why  the  public  inns  attracted  criminal  elements 
of  every  kind.  One  author  writes  that  the  public  inns  of  Rome  "...  in 
spite  of  a  rather  rigorous  state  supervision  were  noted  for  miserable 
accommodations  and  bad  reputations.  In  the  vast  majority  of  cases  these 
inns  were  nothing  but  bawdy  houses  and  were  frequented  by  gangs  of 
thieves  recruited  from  all  races."' 

The  guest  register  began  as  a  police  book  in  France  in  1407.  An  earlier 
law,  enacted  in  France  in  1315,  had  attempted  to  reduce  assassinations 
by  making  the  innkeeper  liable  to  the  estate  of  any  who  died  on  his 
premises.  The  liability  was  for  three  times  the  amount  of  property  the 


Historical  Briefs 


9 


victim  had  been  carrying.  An  easy  alliance  existed  in  those  days  between 
the  innkeeper  and  the  highwayman. 

As  near  to  present  time  and  culture  as  Colonial  New  England,  the 
innkeeper  still  had  none  of  the  modern  ideas  of  service  to  his  guests. 
Following  European  custom,  service  beyond  the  minimal  necessities  was 
reserved  for  "great  folk"  who  were  privileged  by  birth  or  station  in  life. 
A  traveler,  merely  as  such,  had  no  right  to  ask  or  demand  any.  Moreover, 
the  New  England  innkeeper  was  often  held  accountable  by  law  for  the 
moral  conduct  of  his  guests.  He  had  the  prerogative  of  locking  them  in 
the  public  stocks  when  he  judged  they  deserved  it,  and  it  is  clear  from 
accounts  of  the  times  that  he  took  this  responsibility  seriously.  The  guest 
in  the  public  inn  was  still  suspect.  But  times  and  circumstances  were 
changing. 

The  inn  in  America  differed  in  several  ways  from  its  European 
counterpart,  and  it  prepared  the  way  for  the  modern  hotel,  a  thoroughly 
American  invention.  Because  of  the  exigencies  of  frontier  life,  the 
American  inn  from  the  beginning  was  more  of  a  public  institution.  Its 
long  hall  was  the  only  place  to  entertain,  since  at  first  there  were  no 
homes  corresponding  to  the  Old  World  manor  houses  or  outlying 
residences  with  enough  space  to  entertain  privately  on  a  large  scale.  Thus 
the  inn  became  the  democratic  center  of  community  life,  its  role  as  a 
place  of  lodging  for  travelers  often  being  incidental  to  its  role  as  a  social 
center  for  the  town.  Consequently,  the  American  inn  carried  less  stigma 
than  its  European  sisters.  It  developed  further  as  the  London  inns  on 
which  it  was  modeled  began  from  the  1750's  onward  to  improve  and 
achieve  a  reputation— small  enough  praise  in  that  day— as  the  best 
managed  inns  in  the  world. 

Following  the  War  of  Independence,  inns  began  to  be  built  larger  in 
America.  They  became  focal  points  of  a  flowering  of  civic  and  national 
pride,  and  the  diaries  of  more  than  one  foreign  traveler  in  the  new 
country  reflect  indignation  at  the  independence  of  innkeepers  who 
showed  little  humility  before  their  well-born  guests. 

In  1794  the  City  Hotel  was  built  in  New  York.  This  was  one  of  the  first 
uses  of  a  new  word,  hotel,  which  came  to  mean  a  superior  kind  of  an  inn. 
It  was  a  word  imported  from  France,  where  it  meant  simply  a  town  hall 
or  large  house  under  single  administration.  The  City  Hotel  was  the  first 
inn  to  be  financed  by  a  stock  company,  and  it  is  said  to  have  been  the  first 
building  in  America  built  expressly  for  innkeeping  purposes  rather  than 
converted  or  enlarged  from  a  private  residence.  Despite  these  qualifica- 
tions, the  City  Hotel  was  still  an  inn,  with  traditional  disregard  for  the 
guest.  But  the  gestation  period  had  begun. 


10 


The  Art  of  Community 


The  Nineteenth-Century  Hotel 

During  the  first  quarter  of  the  nineteenth  century,  a  parade  of 
oversized  inns  were  built  in  all  the  larger  cities,  culminating  in  a  hotel 
"fever"  which  broke  out  in  America  following  the  completion  of  the 
Tremont  House  in  Boston  in  1829.  This  is  regarded  by  hotelmen  as  the 
true  pioneer  among  hotels— not  because  of  its  size  or  facilities,  but 
because  it  pioneered  what  has  come  to  be  known  in  the  industry  as  "hotel 
service."  For  the  first  time  a  public  inn,  open  to  all  who  could  pay, 
formulated  a  conscious  policy  of  guest  service.  Among  its  striking 
innovations,  the  Tremont  House  offered  as  part  of  its  regular  policy  a 
separate  room  for  each  party  who  requested  it.  No  longer  were  travelers 
required  to  share  rooms,  and  with  each  room  went  free  soap  and  an 
individual  lock  and  key.  Other  innovations  included  a  reading  library, 
which  was  free  to  guests,  and  a  bath  in  the  basement,  which  guests  could 
patronize  instead  of  going  outside  to  a  public  bathhouse. 

The  hotel-building  competition  of  the  next  fifty  years  manifested  the 
braggadocio  spirit  of  young  America.  It  engendered  an  excitement  that 
was  equaled  only  by  the  building  of  the  canals  and  the  railroads.  It  was 
the  first  of  a  series  of  "firsts"  in  the  new  order  of  American  life.  As  one 
author  writes,  "Every  city  and  town  in  the  country  had  to  have  a  hotel  as 
fine  as  the  Tremont  House,  and  sooner  or  later  they  got  it."  Unrivaled  by 
a  comparable  development  anywhere  in  the  world,  American  hotels  of 
that  period  caught  and  held  the  public  imagination  as  did  the  sky- 
scrapers of  a  later  generation. 

This  rapid  development  of  hotels  could  not  be  justified  in  economic 
terms  alone.  For  the  most  part  they  did  not  pay,  or  they  paid  less  than 
comparable. investments  in  other  enterprises.  Many  were  built  by  public 
subscription  promoted  by  local  pride  and  hope  of  drawing  new  popula- 
tion and  business  to  the  growing  community.  But  much  of  the  popular 
enthusiasm  must  also  be  ascribed  to  nationalistic  spirit  and  pride  in  the 
new  Republic.  America  vaunted  its  freedom  and  equality  of  opportunity, 
its  democracy,  its  ban  on  class  distinctions,  and  its  belief  in  the  worth  and 
dignity  of  the  individual.  It  rejected  hereditary  class  privileges  and 
hailed  the  new  era  of  the  common  man.  The  current  saying  in  America 
was  that  every  man  was  a  king.  And  as  kings  have  palaces,  so  did  every 
American.  The  new  hotels  appearing  on  every  hand,  each  open  alike  to 
all  on  equal  terms,  and  each  more  grand  than  the  one  before,  were 
acclaimed  as  the  "palaces  of  the  people."  Hence  the  popular  name  from 
the  period,  "Palace  Hotel." 

In  the  years  following  the  Civil  War,  a  subtle  change  took  place.  The 
public  imagination  was  caught  up  in  new  wonders,  and  the  new  class  of 


Historical  Briefs 


11 


millionaires  began  to  make  the  hotels  their  own  palaces,  setting  them- 
selves apart  from  the  mainstream  of  Americans  by  wholesale  importa- 
tion of  European  titles  and  trappings  of  privilege.  Hotels  became 
symbolic  of  class  distinctions,  the  very  idea  they  had  flaunted  the 
generation  before.  In  an  engaging  book.  The  American  Hotel,  an 
Anecdotal  History,  Jefferson  Williamson  suggests  this  change  and  the 
transition  to  it  in  his  choice  of  names  to  distinguish  three  main  periods  in 
the  nineteenth-century  development  of  the  hotel:  The  Palace  Hotel,  The 
Bowl  and  Pitcher  Period,  and  The  Grand  Hotel.  The  grand  hotel  lost  some 
of  the  public  rapport  of  preceding  decades,  as  hotels  came  to  be  built  as 
much  for  monuments  to  individuals  and  to  the  collective  vanity  of  a  new 
American  "elite"  as  for  local  community  pride.  Finally,  when  their 
rapport  was  at  lowest  ebb,  hotels  became  a  prominent  target  of  the 
temperance  movement. 

The  period  of  the  grand  hotel  extended  into  the  twentieth  century, 
preserving  outdated  business  methods  and  uneconomical  building  design 
long  after  other  businesses  had  begun  to  convert  to  cost  accounting  and 
modern  business  management.  Hotels  throughout  the  period  had  been 
monuments,  entrepreneured  for  almost  any  motive  but  that  of  imper- 
sonal business.  The  inflationary  years  of  the  1920's  disguised  the  hollow 
economic  base  of  the  industry  and  tolerated  its  greatest  building  boom. 
But  during  the  Great  Depression  that  followed  1929,  the  centennial  of 
the  opening  of  the  Tremont  House,  eighty-five  percent  of  the  hotels  in 
the  United  States  went  into  bankruptcy,  many  of  them  two  and  three 
times  over  before  business  began  its  upturn  again. 

The  Modern  Hotel 

"E.  M.  Statler  invented  the  modern  hotel  as  surely  as  Henry  Ford 
invented  the  modern  automobile."  With  these  words,  one  author 
introduces  the  Buff"alo  Statler,  built  in  1908.  Even  during  the  last  years  of 
the  monument  hotels,  a  quiet  change  was  taking  place— a  purely  eco- 
nomic development  in  response  to  changing  needs  and  times.  Ellsworth 
M.  Statler  was  building  hotels  that  were  somewhat  unesthetic  but 
carefully  studied  for  economy  of  operation.  He  standardized  operations 
and  carried  research  into  every  phase  of  the  hotel  business.  He  and 
others  experimented  with  the  chain  organization  concept  which  had 
already  appeared  in  Germany.  These  developments  continued  to  grow— 
and  they  survived  the  Great  Depression.  When  hotels  began  to  be  built 
once  more  in  the  late  1940's,  they  were  no  longer  fashioned  in  the  image 
of  the  monument  hotel. 

The  new  hotel  industry  is  characterized,  instead,  by  chain  and  fran- 
chise operation,  thorough  management  training,  up-to-date  cost-ac- 


12 


The  Art  of  Community 


counting  techniques,  increasing  use  of  automation,  and  research  in  all 
phases  of  hotel  administration.  It  has  undergone  a  change  in  structural 
forms  that  amounts  almost  to  a  revolution  in  building  design. 

Revolution  in  Forms 

Any  account  of  the  purely  formal  changes  in  inns  and  hotels  from 
early  times  must  begin  with  the  functional  distinction  between  wayside 
and  terminal  accommodations.  The  first  is  patronized  mainly  by  the 
traveler  who  is  en  route  and  needs  only  overnight  lodging.  Its  clientele  is 
transitory  by  comparison  with  those  using  terminal  accommodations, 
which  serve  the  traveler  at  his  destination.  The  average  length  of  a 
terminal  stay  is  several  days  (omitting  the  residential  hotel,  which  may 
serve  transients  incidentally  but  functions  primarily  as  an  apartment 
house).  The  two  kinds  of  operation  are  represented  in  their  purest  forms 
by  the  wayside  motel  and  the  metropolitan  city  hotel. 

Both  wayside  and  terminal  functions  are  very  old.  To  say  which 
function  evolved  earlier  is  difficult,  since  each  largely  complements  the 
other.  Wayside  accommodations  may  have  evolved  earliest  as  a  distinc- 
tive architectural  form,  however,  because  of  their  more  specialized 
requirements  and  the  fact  that  terminal  accommodations  could  be 
adapted  from  existing  dwellings.  Wayside  accommodations  early 
evolved  the  widespread  form  of  the  Near-East  caravanserai,  the  essential 
function  of  which  was  to  give  protection  and  shelter  to  a  party  of 
travelers  and  their  animals.  This  form  was  basically  a  circular,  walled 
enclosure  that  could  be  barricaded  at  night— the  center  of  the  enclosed 
space  for  animals  and  baggage,  and  the  shelter  around  the  inner 
perimeter  of  the  walls,  facing  the  court,  for  the  travelers  and  drivers.  This 
was  the  form  of  night  camp  and  defense  adopted  by  American  wagon 
trains  a  century  ago,  closing  the  wagons  in  a  protective  circle.  As  a 
natural  defensive  position,  it  has  probably  always  been  used  by  bands 
traveling  in  open  and  potentially  hostile  country. 

Until  recent  times,  there  was  little  improvement  in  either  kind  of 
accommodation.  The  first  improvements  were  made  in  terminal  accom- 
modations in  England  shortly  before  1750.  By  1800,  London  inns  were 
reputed  to  be  the  best  in  the  world.  But  at  this  point  their  progress 
stopped,  relative  to  events  in  the  New  World.  The  English  wayside 
accommodations,  in  the  meantime,  had  not  shared  the  general  improve- 
ment of  the  London  inns.  But  their  time  came,  about  1815,  when  the 
building  of  macadam  roads  and  the  advent  of  the  stagecoach  gave 
impetus  to  the  development  of  wayside  inns  in  England  and  America. 
This  inaugurated  the  shortlived  era  of  the  English  coaching  inn.  Almost 
as  suddenly,  this  growth  of  wayside  accommodations,  famed  (and 


Historical  Briefs 


13 


fabled)  in  Pickwickian  literature,  ceased.  For  a  century,  it  yielded  to  the 
railroads,  which  lessened  the  time  spent  in  travel  between  cities  and 
towns  and  gradually  offered  all  refreshment  and  dining  facilities  and 
eventually  even  sleeping  accommodations  on  board  the  "iron  horse" 
itself,  making  it  unnecessary  to  stop  en  route  except  briefly  to  let 
passengers  off  and  on.  The  trains  themselves  took  over  the  functions  of 
the  stagecoach  and  the  wayside  inn. 

During  this  century  of  development  and  expansion  of  terminal 
accomodations,  each  decade  witnessed  an  increase  in  the  numbers  and 
kinds  of  travelers.  Who  were  the  people  who  stopped  at  public  hotels? 
During  the  mid- 1 800 's,  drummers  formed  the  largest  traveling  group.  A 
newspaper  poet  of  the  1870's  sang,^ 

Who  puts  up  at  der  besht  hotel, 
Und  dakes  his  oysters  on  der  shell, 
Und  mit  der  frauleins  cuts  a  schwell? 

Der  drummer. 

Then  acting  troupes  joined  in  the  travel  and  became  an  important  class 
of  guests— whole  companies  of  "barnstormers"  instead  of  just  the 
leading  actors,  who  previously  had  toured  alone.  The  last  decades  saw  the 
"emancipated  new  women"  join  the  complement  of  travelers.  Travel 
gradually  became  more  democratic  until  in  the  twentieth  century  not 
only  women,  but  engineers  and  other  professional  people  and  then 
f  amily  groups,  swelled  the  traveling  population. 

The  most  dramatic  post-World  War  I  development  in  America 
occurred  in  the  1920's  when  the  automobile  came  into  general  use. 
Suddenly  the  traveling  public,  which  by  now  included  every  segment  of 
the  population,  gave  up  trains  and  poured  into  the  country  in  automo- 
biles. In  the  first  years,  no  facilities  were  available  in  adequate  numbers. 
Private  homes  were  pressed  into  service,  and  "Tourists"  and  "Guest 
Home"  signs  became  a  common  sight  along  wayside  America. 

This  change  prepared  the  way  for  a  major  readjustment  in  the  hotel 
industry.  The  new  conditions  called  for  the  development  of  that  long 
neglected  branch  of  hotel  operation,  the  wayside  accommodation. 
Traditional  hotelmen  at  first  would  not  recognize  motels  as  part  of  their 
industry.  State  hotel  associations  resisted  extending  membership  to  motel 
owners  until  the  end  of  the  1950's. 

The  motel  form  did  not  stabilize  immediately.  A  new  phenomenon 
entered  the  picture  with  the  growth  of  the  suburbs,  where  motels 
increasingly  served  community  functions  and  the  division  between 


14 


The  Art  of  Community 


wayside  and  terminal  accommodations  was  ambiguous.  Motels  also 
moved  into  the  town  proper,  where  they  adopted  more  complete  hotel 
service  and,  consequently,  competed  successfully  with  small  hotels  of 
less  than  300  rooms.  Hotels  in  turn  modified  their  construction  along 
motel  lines  and,  except  for  the  largest,  moved  out  from  downtown. 
These  hybrid  forms,  intermediate  between  hotels  and  motels,  or 
between  terminal  and  wayside  accommodations,  gradually  came  to  be 
called  "inns." 

In  the  meantime,  the  large  metropolitan  hotels  of  over  a  thousand 
rooms  underwent  a  revolution  of  their  own  after  World  War  II  to 
accommodate  automobiles,  which  had  replaced  trains  as  the  dominant 
mode  of  travel,  and  to  meet  the  demand  for  more  convenience  and  less 
formal  service.  Today  few  large  hotels  are  built  as  separate,  free- 
standing structures.  The  trend  is  to  combine  downtown  hotel  accommo- 
dations with  office  space  and  shopping  facilities  in  large  architectural 
complexes,  aiming  at  a  more  balanced  and  complementary  use  of  land.  It 
is  coming  to  be  recognized  that  the  hotel  business  is  really  a  group  of 
related  businesses  under  one  management.  The  enterprise  is  still  domi- 
nated, as  a  rule,  by  the  room  business,  but  less  than  before. 

Thus  the  hotel,  whose  past  history  could  be  described  clearly  in  terms 
of  the  dual  functions  of  wayside  and  terminal  accommodations,  has 
undergone  a  revolution  of  form.  For  the  past  century  and  a  half,  its 
development  was  affected  strongly  by  changes  in  the  technology  of 
transportation.  The  stagecoach  opened  up  roads  and  brought  about  a 
brief  development  of  wayside  innkeeping.  But  this  lapsed  during  a 
century  dominated  by  rail  transportation,  a  century  in  which  the 
traveling  public  grew  to  include  virtually  the  whole  population.  Then  the 
automobile  reopened  the  countryside  to  road  travel,  and  wayside 
hotelkeeping  came  strongly  into  its  own.  Today  air  travel  is  opening  up 
resort  hotels  in  hitherto  inaccessible  parts  of  the  world.  The  development 
of  suburbs  is  partially  obscuring  the  old  twofold  distinction  between 
terminal  and  wayside  accommodations,  and  the  metropolitan  hotel  is 
becoming  an  integral  part  of  larger  land-use  complexes. 


Historical  Briefs 


15 


Shopping  Centers 

For  the  first  time,  private  enterprise  has  taken  the  initiative  in  creating  a 
new  human  environment,  new  towns  consisting  mostly  of  stores  and  shops, 
but  with  ever-growing  emphasis  on  the  social  and  cultural  functions  of  this 
new  meeting  ground  for  millions  of  people. 

Victor  Gruen 
Women's  Wear  Dai ly^ 

A  shopping  center  is  "a  market  place,  consisting  of  a  group  of 
commercial  establishments  planned  and  developed  as  a  unit  with  the  real 
estate  phase  of  its  operation  under  the  direction  of  a  single  landlord."" 
Its  history  is  shorter  and  somewhat  different  than  the  hotel.  Of  the  12,500 
shopping  centers  in  the  United  States  and  Canada  today,  less  than  100 
were  in  operation  before  1950,  and  not  twenty  before  World  War  II.  The 
story  of  shopping  centers  begins  with  the  story  of  residential 
subdivisions. 

Shortly  after  the  turn  of  the  century,  a  handful  of  land  developers 
including,  among  others,  Edward  H.  Bouton  of  Baltimore,  Jesse  Clyde 
Nichols  of  Kansas  City,  Hugh  Potter  of  Houston,  and  Hugh  Prather  of 
Dallas,  found  a  common  accord  in  their  enthusiasm  for  the  profit 
opportunities  afforded  by  good  land  planning  in  subdivisions.  Among 
the  principles  developed  by  these  men  was  the  thought  that,  if 
commercial  land  uses  could  be  clustered  and  provided  with  a  degree  of 
orderly  development  instead  of  being  strung  out  haphazardly,  the  value 
of  both  residential  and  commercial  property  would  be  protected,  and 
blight  and  eventual  deterioration  of  the  whole  area  might  be  avoided. 
Convenient  and  attractive  shopping  facilitites  would  enhance 
residential  values,  while  good  residential  development  nearby  would 
boost  commercial  values. 

In  his  Roland  Park  development  in  Baltimore  in  1907,  Bouton  is 
credited  with  the  first  shopping  center— a  group  of  stores  set  back  from 
the  street  to  provide  convenient  parking  and  unified  in  their  architectural 
treatment.  For  half  a  century  as  the  shopping  center  evolved  its  most 
efficient  form,  it  was  associated  with  residential  housing  projects.  A 
dozen  or  so  early  examples,  begun  for  the  most  part  in  the  1920's,  include 
the  Janss  Brothers'  Westwood  Village  in  Los  Angeles,  Nichol's  Country 
Club  Plaza  in  Kansas  City,  Potter's  River  Oaks  Shopping  Center  in 
Houston,  Prather's  Highland  Park  Shopping  Village  in  Dallas,  and  the 
Shaker  Heights  Shopping  Center  in  Cleveland. 

The  break  with  the  convention  of  store-front  window  displays  facing 
the  street  occurred  at  this  time.  This  usage,  long  fixed  in  retailing 


16 


The  Art  of  Community 


tradition,  was  no  longer  functional  in  quite  the  same  way  where  most 
shoppers  passed  by  or  arrived  in  cars.  The  community  of  shops  turned 
their  backs  on  the  adjacent  street  and  faced  in  upon  an  open  mall,  a  self- 
contained  cluster  surrounded  on  all  sides  by  expanse  of  parking  lot. 

Meantime,  an  independent  series  of  events  had  been  taking  place, 
events  which  proved  to  be  significant  for  the  development  of  "regional" 
shopping  centers.  In  the  1920's,  department  stores  and  large  mail  order 
firms  such  as  Sears,  Roebuck  and  Company  and  Montgomery  Ward 
found  it  profitable  to  locate  branch  outlets,  sometimes  in  conjunction 
with  a  warehouse,  in  outlying  locations  having  ample  parking  for 
shoppers  who  arrived  by  car.  Reinforcing  this  trend  was  the  parallel 
development  of  chain  grocery  stores  with  adjacent  off-street  parking, 
forerunners  of  the  supermarkets. 

Thus  experience  accumulated.  Construction  of  new  centers  was  de- 
pressed during  the  1930's.  It  picked  up  briefly  in  the  early  1940's,  only  to 
be  interrupted  by  World  War  II.  After  the  war,  however,  shopping 
centers  appeared  overnight  in  every  part  of  the  country  as  small  home 
construction,  spurred  by  public  subsidies  under  Federal  Housing  Admin- 
istration and  Veterans'  Administration  legislation,  swelled  to  unexpected 
tides  and  etched  the  first  lines  of  the  new  "suburbia." 

In  the  spring  of  1950,  with  the  opening  of  Northgate,  in  Seattle,  the 
main  trunk  of  shopping  center  development  branched.  A  new  type,  the 
"regional"  center,  appeared.  Hitherto,  centers  had  served  housing 
projects  and  neighborhoods.  They  had  stocked  convenience  goods,  such 
as  food,  housewares,  drugs,  and  cosmetics,  purchased  at  more  or  less 
frequent  intervals  and  with  a  minimum  of  comparison  shopping. 
Shoppers'  goods,  consisting  of  items  such  as  furniture,  clothing,  and 
heavy  appliances,  were  sold  in  the  downtown  stores. 

The  new  regional  centers— first  Northgate,  then  Shoppers'  World  near 
Boston  and  Northland  in  Detroit— set  out  deliberately  to  reproduce  the 
facilities  of  a  downtown  business  district.  They  no  longer  depended  on  a 
single  area  of  nearby  homes  but  drew  customers  from  as  far  away  as 
thirty  and  even  forty  minutes  driving  time.  This  required  one  or  several 
major  department  stores  and  a  careful  balance  of  tenants  to  achieve 
maximum  "cumulative  pull."  It  required  a  combination  of  vigorously 
competing  stores  to  provide  the  comparison  shopping  found  in  down- 
town shopping  districts.  Architectural  Forum  commented  at  the  time. 

The  need  to  provide  an  equivalent  of  the  comparative  shopping  possible 
downtown  means  planning  for  competition.  This  term,  which  only  yesterday 
would  have  been  considered  self-contradictory,  may  point  to  a  strong  new 
strand  in  the  American  economic  fabric. 


Historical  Briefs 


17 


James  B.  Douglas,  Northgate's  manager,  worded  a  rule  in  the  1950's 
that  was  widely  repeated  as  the  Noah's  Ark  Principle:  "In  a  regional 
center  follow  the  Noah's  Ark  idea,  have  two  of  everything."  Today  his 
rule  is  obsolete;  two  are  inadequate. 

The  shopping  center,  because  of  its  newness,  is  still  not  well  under- 
stood. The  major  problems  which  beset  it  are  in  a  real  sense  growing 
pains.  The  decade  of  the  1950's  was  less  a  search  for  physical  form  than 
for  principles  of  management  and  operation.  This  search  for  social 
organization  became  the  major  emphasis  of  the  1960's  and  will  continue 
in  the  1970's. 

At  first,  it  was  thought  that  the  development  of  a  shopping  center 
entailed  no  more  than  building  the  physical  facilities  and  leasing  them. 
The  role  of  the  owner  or  his  representative  in  the  on-going,  daily 
management  of  the  shopping  center  was  underestimated  or  even  over- 
looked. There  had  yet  to  develop  in  the  shopping  center  field  a  concept 
equivalent  to  that  of  "hotel  service"  which  marked  the  line  of  departure 
from  the  inn  to  the  hotel  in  the  nineteenth  century.  The  major  postwar 
event  besides  the  introduction  of  the  regional  center  was  to  be  the 
development  of  service-oriented  center  management— a  management 
oriented  toward  serving  the  tenants  in  the  same  way  that  they  in  turn 
were  oriented  toward  serving  their  customers. 

Paralleling  the  evolution  of  management  has  been  the  growth  of 
merchants'  associations.  Although  seemingly  separate,  the  two  have 
unfolded  together,  for  the  success  of  the  merchants'  association  depends 
on  management  providing  leadership.*  As  Northgate's  Douglas  again 
put  it,  "the  shopping  center  developer  is  in  an  ideal  position  to  act  as  a 
catalyst  in  bringing  all  his  tenants  together  into  a  hard-hitting  promo- 
tional team."'  The  Urban  Land  Institute  also  counsels: 

Experience  indicates  that  the  organization  and  operation  of  the  association 
should  be  left  to  the  merchants  but  that  the  owner  must  participate.  Without 
the  active  and  energetic  assistance  of  the  owner  in  stimulating  interest, 
originating  and  launching  promotions,  preparing  budgets,  and  coordinating 
all  activities,  there  will  be  no  active  association. 

Merchants'  associations  were  formed  for  a  different  purpose  than  they 
now  mainly  fulfill.  In  order  to  make  rents  as  low  as  possible  for 

*In  twelve  case  studies  of  merchants'  associations  reported  by  Richard  Nelson, '  two  had 
insufficient  exfjerience  on  which  to  base  an  opinion.  Of  the  remaining  ten,  four  suffered 
because  the  owner  exercised  either  too  little  leadership  (two  cases)  or  "too  much"  (two  cases). 
None  was  free  of  difficulties.  Diagnoses  of  the  remaining  six  had  to  do  with  insufficient 
membership  (one  case),  insufficient  program  (two  cases),  disagreement  over  assessments 
(one  case),  and  insufficient  organization  (one  case).  All  of  these  deficiencies  reflect 
inadequate  leadership  which  could  have  been  remedied  by  the  owner. 


18 


The  Art  of  Community 


merchants  who  had  still  to  be  sold  on  the  idea  of  shopping  centers, 
developers  after  World  War  II  separated  many  costs  of  maintenance 
from  the  quoted  rent  and  commonly  left  some  housekeeping  and 
maintenance  problems  of  the  center  to  the  tenants.  Merchants'  associa- 
tions were  formed  in  part  to  meet  these  common  needs.  The  question  of 
joint  promotion  to  supplement  individual  advertising  very  soon  arose 
and  was  recognized  as  chiefly  an  association  function. 

Gradually  the  realization  grew  that  the  possibility  of  real  group  action 
under  effective  leadership  was  one  of  the  great  strengths  of  the  shopping 
center  idea  and  that  the  importance  of  merchants'  associations  lay  in  the 
development  of  eff'ective  joint  promotions.  Today  it  is  accepted  that 
merchants'  associations  are  essential  to  successful  shopping  center 
operation.  The  housekeeping  functions  of  the  center  are  more  and  more 
being  assumed  by  the  management  directly  in  order  to  reduce  their  costs 
and  to  permit  the  retailer  to  concentrate  on  the  job  of  merchandising. 

The  newness  of  the  shopping  center  operation  was  evident  also  in  the 
area  of  finance  and  tenant  selection.  Because  of  the  absence  of  informa- 
tion about  the  investment  characteristics  of  shopping  centers,  lenders 
found  it  necessary  to  rely  on  the  credit  ratings  of  the  tenants.  They 
preferred  major  chains  with  AAA-1  ratings  and  often  refused  to  finance 
centers  where  less  than  sixty  per  cent  of  the  leases  were  with  chain 
merchants.  Developers  soon  learned,  however,  that  many  local  mer- 
chants were  easier  to  work  with,  had  better  local  followings  than  many 
chains,  and  supported  the  association  more  readily.  The  developer  who 
had  to  find  outside  financing  thus  was  limited  in  his  ability  to  choose 
tenants  for  what  he  considered  to  be  in  the  long-term  interest  of  the 
center. 

This  limitation  on  the  developer's  ability  to  select  his  tenants  also 
embarrassed  him  in  lease  negotiations  by  the  added  bargaining  power  it 
gave  to  prospective  "key"  tenants.  Concessions  asked  and  won  took  the 
form  of  "exclusives"  on  certain  lines  of  merchandise,  low  percentage 
rents,  or  percentages  without  minimum.  Thus  additional  leverage  was 
added  to  the  already  strong  bargaining  position  of  the  larger  tenants  and 
especially  the  department  stores— strong  because  of  their  heavy  pulling 
power  which  substantially  contributed  to  the  success  of  all  the  merchants 
in  the  center.  It  became  common  practice  for  key  tenants  to  be  carried  at 
cost  or  even  be  subsidized,  and  for  the  developer  to  attempt  to  make  up 
the  diff'erence  by  charging  higher  rents  to  the  other  tenants. 

The  eff'ective  use  of  leasing  as  a  tool  of  shopping  center  operation  was 
slow  to  develop,  although  it  received  as  much  attention,  perhaps,  as  any 
other  factor.  This  was  due  in  part  to  the  fact  that  shopping  centers  were 


Historical  Briefs 


19 


not  always  developed  by  experienced  real  estate  people,  and  in  part  to 
the  limitations  on  tenant  selection  imposed  by  lenders.  It  was  also  partly 
due  to  the  failure  of  developers  to  recognize  at  the  negotiating  table  the 
full  potential  value  of  what  they  had  to  offer,  and  to  their  failure,  through 
inadequate  management,  to  achieve  that  potential  value.  While  shop- 
ping centers  proved  to  be  successful  for  their  merchant  tenants,  they  were 
slow  to  live  up  to  the  expectations  of  their  owners  and  backers. 

The  importance  of  both  of  these  aspects  of  shopping  center  manage- 
ment—effective leadership  and  skillful  leasing— led  to  a  disagreement, 
recurrent  in  the  trade  media,  about  the  fundamental  nature  of  a 
shopping  center.  Some  held  that  a  shopping  center  essentially  was  a 
merchandising  operation  and  should  be  sponsored  by  merchants— men 
familiar  with  promotion  and  able  to  work  closely  and  continuously  on 
behalf  of  the  tenants.  Others  held  that  a  center  essentially  was  a  real 
estate  proposition  and  should  be  promoted  by  people  experienced  in  real 
estate. 

Shopping  center  operation  has  little  in  common  with  land  brokerage  or 
speculation,  the  traditional  supports  of  the  real  estate  business.  It  has 
everything  to  do,  however,  with  property  management,  that  youngest 
branch  of  the  real  estate  business  which  promises  to  become  the  most 
important.  With  the  exception  of  hotel  administration,  professional 
property  management  is  little  developed.  Shopping  center  management, 
in  turn,  is  among  the  youngest  divisions  of  this  new  field;  yet  it  requires 
skill  and  specialization  surpassing  that  of  the  management  of  the  most 
complex  hotel.  It  is  basically  a  question  of  community  management, 
requiring  the  continuous  coordination  of  many  private  interests,  a  new 
function  for  real  estate. 

The  question  of  the  nature  of  shopping  center  management,  whether  it 
is  basically  a  merchandising  or  a  real  estate  venture,  had  relevance 
therefore  to  the  practical  question  of  who  would  sponsor  shopping 
centers. 

Department  stores,  recognizing  that  the  superior  drawing  power  of 
their  stores  was  a  heavily  contributing  factor  in  the  success  of  a  center, 
felt  that  they  would  probably  be  smart  to  cut  out  independent  manage- 
ment altogether  and  to  assume  the  management  functions  themselves, 
either  directly  or  through  a  subsidiary  corporation,  thereby  enjoying  the 
whole  benefit  of  the  increase  in  surrounding  land  values  for  which  their 
store  was  responsible.  This  argument,  however,  underestimated  both  the 
specialized  requirements  of  center  operation  and  the  collective  impor- 
tance of  smaller  stores.  Some  department  stores  soon  found  center 
administration  to  be  too  demanding  of  their  staffs'  time,  and  ownership 
of  real  estate  to  be  a  commitment  of  capital  that  they  were  specialized  to 


20 


The  Art  of  Community 


use  more  productively  in  other  Unes.  Furthermore,  some  found  incom- 
patibilities between  their  role  as  dominant  tenant  and  that  of  the 
manager  who  must  represent  the  center  as  a  whole. 

An  underlying  temptation,  moreover,  where  a  center  is  sponsored  by  a 
dominant  store  is  to  allow  the  rest  of  the  center  to  become  merely  a 
subsidized  or  break-even  operation  to  set  off  the  sponsoring  store. 

Nevertheless,  some  of  the  most  successful  regional  centers  were 
sponsored  by  department  stores.  After  about  1956,  chain  stores  began  to 
build  and  operate  small  neighborhood  and  community  shopping  centers. 
Sponsorship  by  a  leading  tenant  had  certain  advantages  at  this  early 
stage  of  shopping  center  know-how.  First,  a  leading  store  thoroughly 
understood  merchandising  and  was  often  more  than  able  to  balance  its 
conflict  of  role  interest  by  providing  a  measure  of  positive  leadership 
and  participation  in  the  life  of  the  center  that  still  was  not  enough 
emphasized  by  shopping-center  management  generally.  Secondly,  de- 
partment store  and  chain  organizations  did  not  have  to  look  for  outside 
financing.  They  were  able,  therefore,  to  develop  a  center  according  to 
their  own  best  knowledge  of  the  situation.  Their  financial  independence 
gave  them  an  important  freedom  in  tenant  selection  where  independent 
developers  often  were  required  to  balance  the  long-term  interests  of  the 
center  against  the  chain  store  leases  they  needed  in  order  to  get 
financing.  Finally,  they  could  afford  to  move  leisurely  toward  the 
completion  of  their  leases,  which  further  enhanced  their  bargaining 
position. 

Thus,  sponsorship  of  centers  by  a  major  tenant,  despite  its  inherent 
weakness,  was  helped  by  considerable  strengths  in  both  phases  of 
management,  the  traditional  real  estate  functions  of  finance  and  leasing, 
and  the  developing  role  of  leadership.  The  debate  will  eventually 
diminish  as  more  knowledge  of  the  income  characteristics  of  shopping 
centers  becomes  available  to  the  financial  world  and  as  the  leadership 
role  of  shopping  center  management  becomes  better  understood  and 
performed. 

The  signs  are  encouraging.  Before  1955,  the  extensive  trade  literature 
on  shopping  centers  dealt  almost  entirely  with  matters  of  location 
analysis,  physical  layout,  and  traffic  pattern.  As  principles  have  been 
found  for  resolving  the  initial  problems  of  physical  form,  and  as  centers 
more  and  more  begin  to  be  concerned  with  operation  instead  of  with 
planning  and  building  alone,  the  literature  of  shopping  centers  reflects 
an  increasing  trend  of  thought  toward  matters  of  social  organization,  the 
activities  and  organization  of  merchants'  associations,  and  the  all- 
important  role  of  management. 


Historical  Briefs 


21 


Industrial  Estates 

Is  it  possible  to  conceive  of  these  industrial  districts  fifty  years  hence  as  little 
islands  of  heaven,  where  the  property  owner  has  practical  self-restraint  and 
self-enforcement  superior  to  the  standard  of  public  morality  generally 
prevalent? 

Ronald  Wank 
Architectural  Forum 

When  financier  Marshall  Stevens  conceived  and  built  the  ship  canal 
that  "brought  the  sea  up  to  Manchester"  before  the  close  of  the 
nineteenth  century,  he  expected  that  cotton  would  thereafter  be  diverted 
from  Liverpool  through  Manchester,  making  a  paying  proposition  of  the 
canal.  But  the  cotton  did  not  flow,  and  the  canal  remained  empty  of 
traflSc.  The  cotton  millers  had  formed  ties  by  marriage  with  the  cotton 
shippers  of  Liverpool,  and  these  bonds  were  sufficient  to  prevent  the 
cotton  traffic  from  quitting  its  customary  ways.  Searching  how  to  save  the 
canal  investment,  Marshall  Stevens  hit  on  the  idea  of  preparing  a  large 
tract  of  land  in  Manchester  for  industrial  use,  laying  in  streets  and 
supplying  the  sites  with  utilities  and  services  designed  to  facilitate 
industry,  then  inviting  manufacturers  to  lease  sites  there— a  community 
of  industries  whose  freight  on  the  canal  would,  in  time,  recover  his 
combined  investment.  Thus  was  built  Trafford  Park,  England's  first 
industrial  estate.  The  year  was  1896. 

Stevens'  venture  succeeded.  Others,  such  as  the  Slough  Trading  Estate, 
near  London  (1920),  followed  the  pioneering  example  of  Trafford  Park. 
A  Government  program  for  "depressed  areas"  after  1936  ironically 
brought  to  an  end  the  private  development  of  industrial  estates  in 
England. 

In  the  United  States,  somewhat  similar  developments  started  in 
Chicago  and  Kansas  City:  The  Clearing  Industrial  and  Central  Manu- 
facturing Districts  in  Chicago  in  1899  and  1905,  and  the  North  Kansas 
City  Industrial  District  in  1900.  Industry  City,  a  part  of  Bush  Terminal  in 
New  York,  also  began  in  1905.  The  number  of  these  experiments  in 
industrial  plant  location  remained  small  for  nearly  half  a  century.  As  late 
as  1947  there  were  few  planned  industrial  districts  of  any  note.  Subse- 
quently their  growth  pattern  paralleled  that  of  shopping  centers,  with 
rapid  development  starting  in  the  late  1940's.  In  1969,  they  numbered 
approximately  3,500,  over  ninety  per  cent  of  them  established  after 
1950.  They  vary  greatly  in  size,  the  largest  being  those  that  have  been 
established  longest. 

Unlike  other  examples  of  proprietary  communities,  such  as  hotels, 
shopping  centers,  and  mobile-home  parks,  industrial  estates  are  a  British 


22 


The  Art  of  Community 


invention.  The  variant  that  grew  up  in  the  United  States,  known  since 
about  1950  as  the  "industrial  park,"  is  only  now  beginning  to  experiment 
with  the  leasehold  land  policy  that  characterized  the  industrial  estates 
from  their  inception.  The  industrial  park  idea  is  based  on  speculative 
land  subdivision  rather  than  on  property  management  as  an  on-going 
business. 

The  industrial  park  consists  of  "a  tract  of  land  subdivided  and 
developed  according  to  a  comprehensive  plan  for  the  use  of  a  community 
of  industries."'"  The  industrial  estate,  on  the  other  hand,  is  specifically 
defined  as  "a  large  tract  of  land  that  has  been  developed  in  accordance 
with  master  plans  to  accommodate  industry  and  which  has  been  sub- 
jected to  overall  and  continuous  control  under  a  leasehold  system  of 
tenure.""  Thus,  the  industrial  park  developer  has  traditionally  empha- 
sized sales.  While  he  has  also  leased  in  order  to  accommodate  either 
market  preference,  he  has  looked  forward  to  selling  off  all  the  sites 
eventually  and  concluding  his  interest  in  the  area. 

Until  all  or  nearly  all  of  the  sites  in  an  industrial  park  are  sold,  the 
developing  organization  normally  holds  title  to  the  streets  and  common 
areas,  dedicating  these  to  the  city  or  to  an  association  of  the  property 
owners  for  further  maintenance  only  when  it  no  longer  has  an  interest  in 
the  subdivision.  But  because  of  the  policy  of  leasing  sites  when  this  is 
preferred  by  the  prospective  occupant,  only  a  small  number  of  industrial 
park  subdivisions  have  in  fact  ever  been  entirely  sold  off,  and  the 
developing  organization  in  most  cases  has  continued  to  exercise  an  active 
interest  in  the  district  to  protect  and  improve  its  investment  in  the  unsold 
sites.  Many  developers  who  began  with  short-term  expectations  have 
found  themselves  with  a  continuing  long-term  interest  in  the 
subdivision.* 

The  English  industrial  estates  followed  a  leasehold  policy  in  order  to 
maintain  a  unified  land  authority,  thus  providing  flexibility  for  a  gradual 
and  continuing  adjustment  of  the  land-use  pattern  to  changing  condi- 
tions as  sites  reverted  or  leases  came  up  for  renewal.  The  differing 
practice  in  American  industrial  parks  may  be  due  to  the  prevailing 
emphasis  placed  in  this  country  on  "turning  over"  land  as  the  way  to 
profit  from  real  estate.  The  opening  up  of  new  land  in  the  West  helped 
establish  land  subdivision  and  speculation  as  the  American  pattern. 

*W.  N.  Mitchell  and  M.  J.  Jucius  noted  this  effect  as  early  as  1933:  "Though  undoubtedly 
it  was  the  intention  of  the  originators  of  the  districts  that  they  should  be  self-liquidating, 
experience  has  shown  that  such  a  possibility  is  at  best  a  remote  one  on  account  of  the 
pronounced  preference  on  the  part  of  many  industries  to  lease  rather  than  buy  plant  sites." 
Some  parks  which  have  not  leased,  however,  such  as  Airlawn  in  Dallas,  which  opened  in 
1938,  have  sold  out  their  subdivisions  altogether. 


Historical  Briefs 


23 


Industrial  parks,  or  organized  industrial  districts  as  they  are  sometimes 
called,  have  been  criticized  by  Gilbert  Hardman  for  their  failure  to 
devise  a  land  policy: 

The  fact  that  these  estates  are  under  leasehold  control  is  one  of  the  prime 
differences  between  an  industrial  estate  and  an  organized  industrial  district. 
We  feel  that  it  is  only  under  such  a  system  that  it  is  possible  to  insure  that  the 
standards  of  an  industrial  estate  are  maintained  after  it  has  once  been 
developed.  It  is,  of  course,  true  that  you  can  set  restrictive  convenants  on  land 
in  an  organized  industrial  area  which  is  developed  for  sale  but,  in  practice, 
these  restrictions  are  difficult  to  enforce  and,  besides,  the  developer  usually 
loses  interest  once  he  has  disposed  of  the  majority  of  properties  in  the  area 
and  then  it  falls  to  the  Municipality  to  subject  the  area  to  its  usual  planning 
controls.  Under  leasehold  control,  however,  the  landlord  is  vitally  interested 
in  the  future  of  the  estate  and  in  the  maintenance  of  property  values  there.  He 
also  has  the  power  to  enforce  his  restrictions  through  the  covenants  of  the 
leases. ' 

In  the  absence  of  any  policy  for  perpetual  management  of  the  district 
by  the  original  developer,  one  of  the  chief  concerns  in  industrial 
subdivisions  has  been  the  problem  of  how  to  assure  continuing  and  firm, 
yet  at  the  same  time  flexible,  land  controls  in  the  district.  Some  progress 
has  been  accomplished  in  this  direction  by  means  of  private  covenants  in 
deeds,  especially  with  the  gradual  substitution  of  density  and  perform- 
ance standards  for  prohibitions  on  specific  land  uses.*  The  success  in 
industrial  subdivisions  to  date,  however,  is  attributable  also  to  the 
original  screening  of  occupants  for  compatibility  by  developers  at  the 
time  when  their  land  interest  was  still  intact,  as  well  as  to  their  continuing 
interest  in  many  subdivisions,  as  previously  noted.  The  importance  of 
strict  land  control  is  verified  by  James  Lee  and  Gilbert  Wong: 

Restrictions  on  the  character  of  industry  and  facilities  permitted  in  an 
industrial  district  are  among  the  most  critical  aspects  of  district  development. 
A  direct  relationship  has  been  noted  between  the  extent  of  restrictions  and  a 
district's  success;  this  relationship  results  from  the  degree  of  attraction  that  a 
properly  restricted  district  holds  for  industrial  occupants.  The  restrictions 
insure  compatibility  among  occupants,  and  between  the  district  and  its 
neighbors  in  the  community.  Because  of  restrictions,  property  usage  is 
predictable  and  property  values  are  protected. 

The  difficulties  with  restrictive  covenants  in  deeds,  however,  have  been 
their  inflexibility,  once  established,  and  the  problem  of  enforcing  them. 
As  Richard  Murphy  and  William  Baldwin  have  noted,  "Some  provision 

*ExcIusions  of  specific  industries  considered  to  be  incompatible  with  other  contemplated 
land  uses  at  the  time  the  restrictions  are  made  become  dysfunctional  in  the  wake  of 
technological  change.  Performance  standards,  on  the  other  hand,  regulate  such  measurable 
effects  as  "noise,  smoke  and  other  particulate  matter,  vibration,  noxions,  gases,  odors,  glare 
and  heat,  fire  and  explosive  hazards,  traffic  and  waste  disposal." 


24 


The  Art  of  Community 


must  be  made  for  continuing  management  to  enforce  private  restric- 
tions, to  approve  the  admission  of  new  tenants,  and  to  modify  any 
portions  of  the  restrictive  covenants  which  become  unnecessary  or 
unduly  burdensome  in  the  course  of  time.""  Where  such  provision  is  not 
made,  location  in  an  industrial  park  loses  some  of  its  appeal.  Witness  the 
plaint  of  an  industrialist: 

Living  in  a  park  community,  as  in  any  community,  adds  a  set  of  community 
relations  problems  to  the  ordinary  burdens  of  management.  Deed  restrictions 
and  their  continuing  adjustment  undoubtedly  limit  its  flexibility  inherent  in 
some  independent  locations;  the  needs  and  aims  of  the  business  may  change 
but  the  restrictions  go  on.  Room  for  expansion  is  Umited  by  the  closeness  of 
neighbors;  it  may  often  be  relatively  more  expensive  to  provide  for 
expansion  in  a  developed  park  than  by  the  acquisition  of  idle  land  adjoining 
an  independently  located  plant. ' 

Experimentation  with  associations  has  yielded  some  fair  success  in  this 
direction,  at  least  for  the  time  being.  High  standards  reportedly  have 
been  maintained  in  both  the  65th  Street  and  the  Addison  Districts  in 
Chicago,  where  all  sites  were  sold  and  the  control  was  passed  to 
associations  in  1920  and  1946,  respectively.  How  permanent  this  solution 
may  be  in  the  absence  of  continued  interest  on  the  part  of  the  developer 
is  still  a  question,  especially  as  replanning  becomes  necessary  or  if  some 
disagreement  arises  among  the  owners. 

A  third  and,  in  the  long  term,  perhaps  a  more  serious  weakness  of 
private  covenants  as  a  means  of  land  control  is  that  they  offer  no  way  in 
the  future  of  altering  the  basic  land-use  pattern,  made  rigid  by  divided 
ownerships,  as  needs  and  concepts  of  planning  and  land-use  change. 
Land  economist  Richard  Ratcliff,  in  his  classic  text.  Urban  Land 
Economics,  observes  of  residential  subdivision,  "once  the  lots  have  been 
sold  off  into  individual  ownership,  even  a  few  of  them,  replanning  and 
resubdividing  become  virtually  impracticable."'* 

This  is  a  difficulty  that  has  not  been  widely  encountered  as  yet  because 
of  the  newness  of  planned  industrial  districts.  Furthermore,  because  of 
the  speculative  and  hence  short-term  aspect  of  the  subdivision  operation, 
it  is  to  the  interest  of  the  subdivider  to  ignore  it.  To  call  attention  to  it 
would  be  to  call  attention  to  defects  in  the  product,  defects  which  he  feels 
powerless  to  remedy.  It  would  be  "knocking  the  merchandise."  Realtors, 
therefore,  have  paid  scant  attention  to  this  very  fundamental  aspect  of 
land  planning. 

There  is  at  present,  however,  a  tendency  to  experiment  with  lease-only 
policies  in  some  of  the  newer  developments.  Examples  are  Roosevelt 
Field  Industrial  District  in  New  York,  Sunshine  State  Industrial  Park  in 


Historical  Briefs 


25 


Florida,  Stanford  Industrial  Park  in  California,  and  some  Canadian 
developments  in  the  line  of  the  British  industrial  estates  such  as  Annacis 
Island,  British  Columbia.  We  may  expect  this  to  become  the  prevailing 
trend  for  reasons  that  will  be  developed  in  the  next  chapter. 

Since  industrial  parks  are  not  as  widely  known  as  hotels  and  shopping 
centers,  which  involve  the  public  directly,  it  may  be  desirable  to  discuss 
some  of  the  kinds  of  services  they  offer  their  tenants. 

The  developer  of  an  industrial  park  assembles  the  tract,  obtains 
appropriate  zoning,  and  plans  and  improves  the  land  by  grading, 
providing  water  supply,  sewage  disposal  and  surface  drainage  facilities, 
laying  in  streets  and  curbing,  installing  industrial  utilities  and  rail  leads, 
and  landscaping  the  sites.  The  fully  developed  district  offers  a  full  range 
of  services  including  architectural,  engineering,  and  construction  serv- 
ices, building  and  ground  maintenance,  construction  financing,  publicity 
assistance,  warehousing  and  trucking,  banking,  restaurants,  medical  and 
club  facilities,  and  district  police  and  fire  protection.  The  developer  may 
offer  prospective  customers  a  "package  plan"  similar  to  the  one  de- 
scribed for  Bergen  County  Industrial  Terminal,  New  Jersey: 

The  package  plan  for  occupants  of  the  terminal  comprises  full  service,  with 
respect  to  plant  layout,  building  design,  taking  of  competitive  bids,  awarding 
of  contracts,  supervision  of  construction,  and  arranging  for  financing  of 
ownership  or  lease.  The  service  also  includes  full  consideration  of  the 
prospect's  tax  situation,  labor  problems,  shipping  and  mailing  requirements, 
and  utility  needs.  The  company  engages  its  architects  and  engineers  on 
contract." 

An  important  function  of  the  developer  is  to  handle  negotiations  with 
government  agencies  on  behalf  of  the  tenants.  The  developer  also 
establishes  the  policies  for  maintenance  of  the  district  and  encourages 
the  formation  of  a  district  association  to  study  special  problems  such  as 
traffic,  taxation,  and  employment,  and  other  problems  relating  to  the 
district  and  to  industry  in  general.  He  prepares  the  occupants  to  assume 
eventually  full  responsibility  through  the  association  for  the  mainte- 
nance of  the  district  and  for  the  administration  of  the  restrictive 
covenants  on  the  land. 

Many  services  in  the  district  need  not  be  supplied  directly  by  the 
developing  organization.  They  may  be  secured  indirectly  by  means  of  a 
selective  admissions  policy  that  is  designed  to  bring  about  a  pattern  of 
compatible  and,  especially,  complementary  land  uses  in  the  district.  Firms 
that  specialize  in  the  services  required  by  other  industries  are  encouraged 
to  locate  in  the  development.  These  include  such  operations  as  warehous- 


Propledod  is  lo  Eibliofeco 
UMiVEftSlDAD  FRANCISCO  MARROQUIN 


26 


The  Art  of  Community 


ing  and  trucking,  electronic  data  processing  centers,  sales  and  sample 
display  centers,  vocational  technical  schools,  research  firms,  recreation, 
hotel  and  restaurant  facilities,  banking,  and  medical  and  professional 
services  of  many  kinds. 

A  district  management  may  provide  many  miscellaneous  services,  as  in 
the  Clearing  District,  Chicago: 

To  assure  rapid  construction,  the  District  carries  in  stock  a  large  inventory  of 
fabricated  steel  and  lumber— a  bit  of  forethought  which  has  often  saved 
months  of  time  on  building  projects,  particularly  during  periods  of  critical 
material  shortages.  .  .  .  Building  materials  adequate  to  erect  a  200,000- 
square-foot  building  are  stocked  at  all  times. 

A  special  attraction  of  park  location  for  small  firms  is  that  it  enables 
them  to  compete  on  a  better  footing  with  larger  and  better  established 
companies.  An  article  in  Industrial  Development  makes  the  point  as 
follows: 

The  essence  of  the  competition  between  small  and  large  companies  is  not 
markets,  not  money,  not  production  facilities.  It  is  management  efficiency. 

This  is  revealed  in  the  area  of  management  controls  and  organization.  One 
way  in  which  managements  of  smaller  businesses  are  achieving  these  controls 
is  by  taking  advantage  of  electronic  data  processing 'through  the  use  of 
centers  where  programming  talent  and  computing  machine  time  can  be 
bought  on  an  hourly  basis.  .  .  .  Handling  the  payroll  for  the  combined  park 
membership,  the  center  can  save  each  firm  up  to  33  per  cent  in  payroll- 
handling  costs.  ■ 

Leasing  instead  of  owning  their  realty  enables  small  companies  with 
limited  borrowing  power  to  use  their  capital  directly  in  their  business  and 
still  compete  for  the  best  talent,  since  a  park  location  gives  them  the 
added  attraction  of  optimum  working  conditions.  All  of  the  better  parks 
enable  tenants  to  make  available  to  their  employees  in  some  degree 
recreational  facilities  such  as  swimming  pools,  bowling  alleys,  ball  fields, 
recreational  rooms,  canteens,  and  beauty  parlors. 

Murphy  and  Baldwin,  in  the  article  cited  earlier,  see  in  these  joint 
economies  a  great  potential  for  the  future  development  of  industrial 
parks: 

The  industrial  park  of  the  future  .  .  .  need  not  be  confined  to  the  kinds  of 
organizations  that  now  use  it— offices,  research  establishments,  light  to 
medium  manufacturers,  assembly  plants,  and  distribution  centers.  It  is 
conceivable,  for  example,  that  a  park  management  could  provide  control 
facilities  that  would  make  a  group  of  chemical  manufacturing  plants 
compatible  with  other  kinds  of  industry  or  even  with  a  commercial  or 


Historical  Briefs 


27 


residential  environment,  although  the  cost  of  such  facilities  would  be 
prohibitive  to  any  individual  plant.  There  may  be  significant  joint  economies 
in  such  things  as  waste  disposal  and  smoke  control. " 

Such  common  facilities  presuppose  a  continuing  managerial  interest. 

The  management  of  an  industrial  district,  like  that  of  a  hotel  or  a 
shopping  center,  is  complex.  The  single  object  of  the  owner,  the  one 
purpose  that  brings  order  into  such  a  many-sided  operation,  is  to 
increase  rents  and  sales  by  making  the  sites  attractive  places  in  which  to  do 
business.  This  is  explicitly  stated  by  an  officer  of  Chicago's  Clearing 
Industrial  District:  "Our  only  interest  is  in  enhancing  the  value  of  our 
land  and  buildings  through  the  creation  of  a  favorable  industrial 
atmosphere."" 

The  last  point  that  should  be  made  in  this  sketch  of  planned  industrial 
districts  is  that,  like  Trafford  Park,  they  began  for  the  most  part  as 
attempts  to  increase  the  profitability  of  other  and  quite  different 
enterprises,  rather  than  as  projects  developed  on  their  own  merits.  The 
main  sponsors  of  planned  industrial  districts  in  the  United  States  before 
the  1940's  were  railroads.  Their  primary  interest  was  to  locate  industry 
along  their  tracks  in  order  to  increase  freight  traffic.  Such  districts  were 
set  up  at  cost  and  were  not  planned  for  entrepreneurial  profit.  The 
continuing  importance  of  such  operations  is  indicated  by  a  statement  in 
the  1968  Annual  Report  of  the  Penn  Central  Railroad:  "Our  industrial 
development  department  assisted  in  the  location  or  expansion  of  567 
manufacturing  plants  in  301  communities  on  Penn  Central  lines  during 
1968.  These  plants  are  expected  to  produce  annual  revenues  for  Penn 
Central  of  $39.4  million  from  more  than  171,000  carloads  of  freight." 
Nevertheless,  a  railroad  official  writes  that: 

Most  of  us  in  the  railroad  development  field  would  prefer  to  see  all  industrial 
districts  or  parks  developed  by  private  interests.  There  are  many  reasons; 
chief  among  them  is  our  reluctance  to  tie  up  capital,  not  only  for  land 
purchase  but  also  development  costs.  .  .  .  There  is  also  the  added  cost  of 
advertising  and  sales. 

Because  they  are  operated  on  a  break-even  basis,  railroad  districts  are 
often  referred  to  as  subsidized  districts.  Additional  subsidized  districts 
which  have  become  popular  since  the  1940's  are  those  sponsored  by 
chambers  of  commerce,  community  development  foundations,  or  local 
governments.  The  purpose  in  each  case  is  to  increase  employment  and 
boost  the  tax  base.  Because  such  districts  are  created  not  for  profit  but  for 
the  indirect  benefit  of  their  sponsors,  they  may  offer  such  bonus 
inducements  to  prospective  occupants  as  low  purchase  price,  deferment 


28 


The  Art  of  Community 


of  taxes,  free  installation  of  utilities,  and  extremely  favorable  purchase 
or  lease  agreements. 

But  one  of  the  striking  factors  in  the  postwar  growth  of  planned 
industrial  districts  has  been  a  rise  in  the  number  of  projects  operated 
directly  for  a  profit  by  real  estate  interests.  This  trend  is  revealed  in  the 
seven-year  period  1960-1967  as  follows: 

Sponsors  1960  1967 

Private  real-estate  developers  32.4%  40.5% 

*Railroads  30.2%  20.6% 

*Community  organizations  17.6%  19.9% 

*Government  agencies  11.0%  5.6% 
*Community  organizations  in  cooperation 
with  others  and  miscellaneous  (universities, 

utility  companies,  etc.)  8.8%  13.4% 

100.0%  100.0% 

*Typically  Subsidized 


It  should  be  observed,  in  addition,  that  quality  development  has 
occurred  not  so  much  among  the  subsidized  districts  as  among  those 
sponsored  and  operated  for  profit.  An  exhaustive  study  undertaken  in 
1961  by  Z.  S.  Malinowski  and  W.  M.  Kinnard,  of  the  University  of 
Connecticut,  revealed  that  those  districts  in  the  United  States  which  were 
sponsored  by  private  real  estate  developers  tended  to  be  larger  in  size,  to 
have  greater  variety  and  numbers  of  tenants,  to  invest  more  in  land 
preparation,  to  have  more  land-use  restrictions,  to  provide  more  services, 
to  market  their  sites  more  readily  and  for  higher  values,  and  to  incline 
more  toward  leasehold.  Fourteen  per  cent  of  the  districts  so  sponsored 
pursued  a  lease-only  policy  at  that  time,  as  against  six  per  cent  for  all 
other  districts.  The  study  revealed  an  interesting  detail  which  serves  to 
highlight  the  creative  nature  of  these  new  industrial  communities: 

A  minor  but  potentially  significant  trend  was  noted  for  new  industrial  districts 
to  provide  some  all-purpose  buildings  as  "incubators"  for  truly  minute  firms. 
In  most  such  cases,  the  expectation  is  that  the  firm  will  move  to  another 
location  within  the  park  if  it  is  successful  and  needs  space  for  expansion. 
Interestingly,  such  "incubator"  space  is  provided  almost  exclusively  in 
districts  sponsored  by  private  real  estate  developers. 

Mobile  Home  Parks 

The  mobile  home  park  represents  the  first  substantial  use  of  ground 
lease  for  single-family  homes.  Its  history  commenced  in  the  late  1940's, 


Historical  Briefs 


29 


when  a  few  automobile  travel  trailers  began  to  be  manufactured  large 
enough  for  permanent  living.  The  resulting  mobile  home  was  the  first 
successful  factory-constructed  house.  Because  it  resembled  a  trailer 
more  than  a  house,  however,  and  was  unfashionable,  the  significance  of 
this  technological  accomplishment  was  overlooked.  Its  implications  are 
still  far  from  being  fully  realized. 

From  the  beginning,  mobile  homes  were  distinguished  from  trailers  by 
their  greater  size.  The  majority  of  trailers  today  measure  eight  feet  wide 
by  twenty  to  twenty-nine  feet  long,  which  approaches  the  maximum  load 
that  can  be  towed  behind  the  family  car.  Mobile  homes,  on  the  other 
hand,  require  special  equipment  for  moving.  Three-fifths  of  the  units 
manufactured  in  1969  were  over  sixty  feet  long,  and  virtually  all  were 
twelve  or  fourteen  feet  wide.  Many  were  manufactured  as  housing 
sections  and  combined  on  site,  doubling  and  even  trebling  the  floor  area. 
Thus  mobile  homes  compete  in  size  with  conventional,  site-constructed 
housing. 

The  trailer  and  the  mobile  home  each  gave  rise  to  a  distinctive  form 
of  proprietary  community.  Trailering  parks  trace  descent  from  the  early 
automobile  campgrounds,  especially  in  California,  of  the  1920's.  They 
have  steadily  increased  in  popularity  and  in  numbers  with  the  growing 
interest  in  camping  and  recreational  vehicles.  After  World  War  II,  the 
mobile  home  park  differentiated  from  it,  a  mutation  which  has  since 
followed  its  own  separate  path  of  development  in  providing  better 
environment  not  for  travel  and  recreation,  but  for  residential  living. 

The  mobile  home  park,  as  commonly  defined,  is  "a  parcel  of  land 
under  single  ownership  which  has  been  planned  and  improved  for 
placement  of  mobile  homes  for  non-transient  use.""  Indeed,  the  more 
than  seven  million  Americans  living  in  mobile  homes  today  are  not 
more  mobile  than  other  segments  of  the  population.  Seldom  is  their 
mobile  home  moved  farther  than  from  the  manufacturer  to  its 
permanent  site,  but  the  fact  that  it  is  relocatable  apparently  has 
psychological  appeal.  For  an  increasingly  mobile  population,  it  is 
attractive  to  think  of  moving  across  the  country  by  sending  the  house 
ahead  and  having  it  ready  to  step  into  and  prepare  a  meal  on  arrival. 

Production  of  mobile  homes  has  burgeoned  in  recent  years  with  the 
rising  construction  costs  of  conventional  housing,  yet  their  popularity 
appears  to  be  based  as  much  on  choice  of  that  style  of  living  as  on 
economic  considerations.  In  1969,  more  than  a  third  of  the  single-family 
housing  starts  in  the  United  States  were  mobile  homes.  Mobile  home 
designs  are  changing  and  appealing  to  a  wider  variety  of  tastes.  As 


30 


The  Art  of  Community 


mobile  homes,  with  or  without  wheels,  become  components  in  town- 
house,  garden  apartment  and  high-rise  forms,  they  will  likely  take  the 
name  of  modular  homes  as  a  generic  term  for  the  entire  class  of  factory- 
produced  housing."* 

The  industry,  however,  has  experienced  for  more  than  a  decade  a 
shortage  of  sites  for  placement  of  new  homes.  Chiefly  responsible  are 
zoning  ordinances,  which  are  commonly  drafted  to  exclude  mobile 
home  parks  of  any  kind  but  which,  ironically,  have  the  effect  of 
protecting  from  competition  the  unattractive  operations  of  the  older 
parks  that  predate  the  zoning  measures.  As  many  of  these  parks,  thus 
protected,  continue  their  outdated  mode,  this  seems  to  further 
underscore  the  "need"  for  continuing  or  extending  the  restrictive 
ordinances.*  However  intended,  zoning  has  slowed  the  process  by  which 
mobile  home  parks  have  outgrown  their  "ugly  duckling"  stage— a  stage 
paralleled  in  the  growth  of  modern  motels  by  the  early  days  of  tourist 
courts  and  roadside  cabins. 

Today's  new  mobile  home  parks  feature  such  tangible  amenities  as 
sodded  and  landscaped  sites  with  two-car,  off-street  parking,  under- 
ground utilities  with  central  TV  antenna  system;  neighborhood  laundry, 
car  wash,  and  recreational  areas;  community  clubhouse  with  meeting 
rooms,  dining  rooms,  exercise  and  sauna  rooms,  heated  swimming  pool, 
and  golf  course.  A  few  parks  even  boast  "equestrian  centers"  and  ocean- 
view  lots.  But  unquestionably  the  single  major  determinant  of  the  quality 
of  life  in  a  park  is  an  intangible,  namely,  management.  So  important  is 
that  aspect  that  a  feature  report  in  Consumer  Bulletin  on  "Choosing  a 
Mobile  Home  Park"  devotes  the  major  part  of  the  discussion  of  what  to 
look  for  in  a  good  park  to  describing  the  attitudes  and  qualifications  of 
the  good  manager." 

The  following  excerpt  from  the  transcript  of  a  talk  given  by  a  pioneer 
park  manager  at  a  trade  meeting  in  1960  is  ingenuous  in  its  expression, 
but  its  keynote  of  responsibility  rings  true  for  park  management 
everywhere  on  every  level  of  sophistication: 

*The  artificial  scarcity  of  sites  has  had  numerous  side  effects,  one  of  which  is  a  reduction  in 
the  mobility  of  mobile  homes.  Not  only  are  many  home  owners  unable,  because  of  the 
shortage,  to  relocate  their  homes  when  moving  to  another  city,  but  they  find  that  many  parks 
will  only  admit  homes  which  have  been  purchased  from  them.  The  desirability  of  "closed" 
versus  "open"  parks  is  being  debated  in  the  industry.  Certainly  there  is  more  architectural 
and  planning  control  possible  in  the  closed  parks.  Only  as  sites  become  more  plentiful  will 
consumer  preferences  become  clear.  In  the  meantime,  the  owner  contemplating  a  move  will 
likely  sell  his  old  home  in  situ,  for  which  it  will  command  a  premium,  and  try  to  buy  a  used 
home  in  situ  in  the  city  he  is  moving  to. 


Historical  Briefs 


31 


You  will  find  that  the  attitude  of  the  people  in  a  park  is  very  different  from 
that  of  people  who  live  in  apartments  or  subdivisions.  I  once  operated 
apartments  in  Chicago.  .  .  .  You  did  not  know  who  lived  across  the  hall  from 
you.  You  did  not  know  who  lived  below  you,  above  you.  A  trailer  park  seems 
to  be  different.*  You  can  move  new  guests  into  the  park  and  the  next 
morning  when  they  walk  down  the  street,  even  without  having  been  formally 
introduced,  they  say  good  morning,  just  like  on  an  ocean  liner.  There  is  a 
kind  of  spirit  in  a  park  that  is  different,  and  you  must  maintain  that.  Now  if 
you  have  an  old  grouch  or  crab,  simply  chase  him  out.  Fortunately,  under  the 
laws  of  Florida,  I  can  put  anyone  out  of  my  park  within  two  hours;  and  I  tell 
my  tenants  that  if  they  do  not  comply,  I  will  hook  on  their  trailer  and  set  it  out 
on  a  federal  highway  and  let  them  do  with  it  what  they  want.  I  have  been 
very  fortunate  in  that  I  never  had  to  tell  anyone  to  turn  down  television  sets, 
radios,  or  hi-fi.  Tenants  all  respect  their  neighbors.  You  do  not  see  any  speed 
limit  signs  or  humps  in  the  road  because  I  tell  them  when  they  come  in  that  I 
am  doing  them  a  favor  to  let  them  live  in  my  park  and  they  must  live  like 
ladies  and  gentlemen.  They  must  not  create  a  nuisance.  I  only  had  to  tell  one 
man  in  my  park  to  change  his  car  muffler.  He  was  deaf.  One  day  I  caught  him 
and  I  said,  "you  have  a  leak  in  your  muffler.  You  are  disturbing  people. 
Change  the  muffler  in  your  car."  He  said,  "Thank  you  for  telling  me." 

I  discovered  you  cannot  operate  a  trailer  park  with  more  than  one  entrance. 
At  first  there  were  two  entrances  in  my  park,  and  I  closed  one.  The  people 
must  know  that  if  anybody  comes  into  the  park,  it  is  private  property.  You 
must  know  everybody  who  comes  into  your  park.  You  have  a  big  responsibil- 
ity. In  my  park  I  have  twelve  widows,  and  I  am  responsible  for  them.  I  have 
to  know  who  comes  into  that  park.  You  do  not  permit  any  solicitors  or 
tradesmen  who  are  unknown  to  you  or  who  break  your  roads  down. 
Tradesmen  must  qualify. 

I  once  got  complaints  from  my  tenants.  They  said  that  the  milk  delivered  to 
them  was  sour,  that  the  eggs  were  not  good.  I  went  to  my  maid  and  she  said 
the  same  thing,  "We  get  sour  cream."  I  called  the  management  of  the  milk 
company  and  stated  that  I  wanted  to  discontinue  the  service  and  told  them 
that  they  could  not  bring  their  trucks  in.  After  calhng  several  other  dairies,  I 
made  a  change.'" 

Despite  the  physical  proximity  of  neighbors  in  the  mobile  home  park, 
one  of  the  advantages  cited  by  residents  is  the  greater  privacy  they  enjoy 
there  as  contrasted  with  living  in  a  subdivision.  This  reflects  community 
management,  which  the  subdivision  lacks,  f 

A  small  percentage  of  mobile  home  communities  are  nevertheless 
developed  as  subdivisions.  Characteristically,  the  developer  sells  off  the 
lots  and  moves  on  to  new  projects.  With  their  land  pattern  frozen  by 
fragmentation  of  title,  many  of  these  subdivisions  have  become  victims 
of  progress  as  mobile  home  design  has  advanced  from  the  eight-wides 

*The  use  of  the  term  trailer  for  mobile  home  still  widely  survived  in  1960. 
fThe  growth  of  home  owners'  associations  in  subdivisions  in  recent  years  represents  an 
attempt  to  overcome  this  deficiency. 


32 


The  Art  of  Community 


to  the  ten,  twelve,  fourteen,  and  double  and  triple-wide  homes  of  today. 
Such  projects  may  have  been  built  to  accommodate  twenty  or  more 
homes  to  the  acre,  where  parks  are  currently  being  built  to  ac- 
commodate six  or  eight.  Their  streets  are  narrow  and  their  basic  lay-out 
is  obsolete  by  the  standards  of  ten  years  later.  More  serious  yet,  if  they 
were  designed  for  eight-wides,  their  lots  are  actually  too  small  to 
accommodate  the  homes  being  produced  today. 

Mobile  home  parks  normally  have  the  option  of  replanning  and 
upgrading  or  even  of  converting  to  a  wholly  different  use  as  the  existing 
leases  revert  or  come  up  for  renewal.  Obsolescence  can  be  programmed 
out  systematically.  In  subdivisions,  however,  the  land  pattern  is  perma- 
nently committed,  and  reassembly  and  redevelopment  are  unlikely 
except  where  compelled  through  condemnation.  This  is  the  problem  in 
miniature  of  all  cities,  which  are  simply  larger,  agglomerate  subdivisions. 
Few  sights  are  quite  so  discouraging  as  an  obsolete  mobile  home 
subdivision.  It  is  a  permanent  reminder  on  the  landscape  of  the  crude 
designs  of  early  mobile  home  parks— evidence  that  nature  rewards 
flexibility  and  punishes  rigidity  in  her  always  evolving  forms. 

Mobile  home  parks  in  the  United  States  are  estimated  at  more  than 
16,000,  of  which  less  than  12,000  in  1970  met  the  minimum  standards  for 
listing  by  Woodall's,  the  established  directory  service  in  the  mobile  home 
park  field. ^'  The  fact  that  the  number  of  Woodall's  listings  has  declined 
by  an  average  of  four  per  cent  each  year  since  1962,  despite  the 
construction  of  new  parks,  reflects  the  rapid  upgrading  of  standards 
required  to  keep  abreast  of  the  changing  industry.  Only  3,000  parks  in 
1970  were  rated  "three  stars"  or  better,  the  classification  which  Woodall's 
considers  to  be  truly  in  the  housing  field  and  competitive  with  new  parks 
being  built. 

By  extrapolating  present  trends,  the  following  would  seem  to  be  some 
reasonable  inferences  about  the  future: 

The  single-family  house  more  and  more  will  be  a  relocatable 
structure  that  will  be  owned,  in  effect,  as  personal  property  is  owned 
rather  than  as  real  estate  permanently  fixed  to  the  soil.  By  the  end  of 
the  1970's,  despite  the  likelihood  of  a  near-term  rise  in  mobile-home 
subdivisions  as  mobile  homes  come  to  be  regarded  as  standard  housing 
and  are  treated  in  the  conventional  housing  way,  the  sites  to  ac- 
commodate housing  will  increasingly  be  rented  instead  of  owned.  In 
deciding  whether  to  buy  their  home  site,  the  family  of  the  future  will 
weigh  the  prospects  for  appreciating  value  in  the  site  against  the 
amenities  of  a  leased  site— and  also,  of  course,  against  alternative 
investments  they  might  make.  Demand  for  residential  amenities  will 
become  a  potent  market  force  in  favor  of  leasehold  living. 


Historical  Briefs 


33 


The  house  structure  itself  has  developed  thus  far  in  standard  twelve- 
foot  widths  because  that  is  the  width  of  a  traffic  lane  on  which  the 
structure  must  travel  from  the  factory.  The  house  will  show  more 
variety  of  form  as  airlift  transport  comes  within  reach  economically  of 
the  majority  of  homeowners. 

The  communities  that  will  provide  the  environments  for  the  new 
housing  are  already  taking  on  new  forms.  On  the  drawing  boards  are 
high-rise  structures  in  which  the  module  will  be  lifted  by  crane,  elevator, 
or  helicopter  to  its  prepared  site.  Already  in  planning  are  mobile  home 
cities  of  5,000  or  more  units,  designed  in  neighborhood  clusters  and 
including  recreational  open  space,  hotels,  and  commercial  center.  Of  the 
four  forms  of  proprietary  community  sketched  in  this  chapter,  the 
mobile  home  park  is  the  most  in  flux  as  to  the  physical  forms  it  will  take 
in  the  1970's  and  beyond,  as  it  becomes  a  major  expression  of  single- 
family  living  in  the  United  States. 

Some  Other  Forms 

This  chapter  has  sketched  the  backgrounds  of  four  specific  forms  of 
proprietary  community.  In  addition  to  these  and  some  other  specialized 
types  equally  well-defined,  a  parallel  development  of  what  might  be 
termed  real  estate  complexes  has  taken  place.  A  precursor  was  Rockefeller 
Center,  begun  in  1932.  Again,  however,  no  great  development  occurred 
until  the  1950's.  The  group  includes  many  combinations  of  land  uses, 
often  incorporating  in  a  single  plan  facilities  for  retail  shopping, 
professional  and  commercial  offices,  recreational  and  cultural  amenities, 
hotels  and  apartments,  medical  centers,  and  sometimes  even  warehous- 
ing and  light  industry. 

Office  centers  and  science  research  centers  also  deserve  mention, 
although  it  is  not  yet  clear  how  much  development  they  will  have  as 
separate  specialized  forms  apart  from  more  complex  groupings.  The 
medical  clinic  is  yet  another  form  which  is  evolving  its  own  characteristic 
pattern,  while  privately  owned  trailering  parks  and  campgrounds,  which 
already  numbered  more  than  9,500  in  the  United  States  in  1969,  will 
have  an  enormous  development  in  the  1970's. 

The  1950's  also  saw  the  first  significant  growth  of  the  marina,  which 
had  its  beginning  in  the  1920's  and  1930's.  Like  shopping  centers, 
marinas  are  developed  both  independently  and  in  conjunction  with 
residential  subdivisions.  In  addition  to  renting  boat  slips  with  utilities, 
they  may  offer  restaurants,  a  variety  of  shops  and  stores,  and  hotel  or,  as 
they  may  be  called,  boatel  accommodations.  By  1969,  there  were  approxi- 
mately 5,000  marinas  in  the  United  States  and  Canada.  The  future  of 


34 


The  Art  of  Community 


marinas  seems  assured  by  the  growing  popularity  of  boating;  in  1968, 
the  number  of  pleasure  boats  on  U.  S.  waters  was  estimated  at  nearly  8.5 
million,  or  one  for  every  twenty-four  persons,  while  retail  boat  spending 
approached  $3.2  billion" 

The  last  of  the  other  forms  to  be  mentioned  is  the  generalized 
community  having  a  full  complement  of  land  uses.  Still  largely  a 
hypothetical  case  (a  very  few  are  in  planning  or  construction),  it  is 
virtually  certain,  barring  some  national  mishap,  to  make  an  important 
appearance  before  the  end  of  the  1970's.  Its  precursors  then  will  be  the 
comprehensive  planned  subdivisions  called  "new  towns,"  which  already 
are  retaining  unitary  title  to  the  land  in  the  industrial  and  commercial 
areas  and  in  the  town  centers.  These  "new  towns"  are  characterized  by 
the  Urban  Land  Institute  as  follows: 

More  recently  we  find  the  terms  self-contained,  integrated,  satellite,  and 
balanced,  used  to  describe  new  communities  which  are  designed  to  accom- 
modate residential,  commercial,  and  industrial  uses  in  harmonious  patterns 
and  compatible  surroundings.  Two  notable  examples  of  this  trend  are  found 
in  Don  Mills,  a  new  community  in  the  Toronto  area,  and  Elk  Grove  Village  in 
the  Chicago  area.  Although  not  truly  self-contained  or  self-sufficient,  as  the 
term  would  imply,  this  type  of  development  has  proved  that  with  careful 
planning  and  judicious  development  it  is  possible  to  house  selected  indus- 
tries, commercial  activities  and  residences  in  the  same  development  without 
detracting  in  any  way  from  the  livability,  attractiveness,  or  efficiency  of  any 
of  the  above  land  uses.  In  the  Don  Mills  development,  for  example,  the 
industrial  areas  are  fully  as  attractive  as,  and  in  complete  harmony  with,  the 
residential  and  commercial  areas.  Happily,  this  type  of  development  appears 
to  be  gaining  in  popularity. 

A  number  of  "self-contained"  communities  are  presently  in  various  stages  of 
planning  and  development  throughout  the  country— especially  in  such 
rapidly  growing  states  as  California  and  Florida.  One  such  development 
currently  underway  is  Laguna  Niguel,  a  7,000-acre  project  in  the  area  south 
of  Los  Angeles.  This  self-contained  community  has  its  own  water  and  sewer 
authority  and  is  designed  to  accommodate  a  research  park  and  an  industrial 
park  as  well  as  residential,  school,  governmental  and  commercial  areas. 

Conclusions 

All  of  the  proprietary  communities  considered  in  this  chapter  are  of 
recent  origin,  at  least  in  their  modern  forms.  The  first  half  of  the 
twentieth  century  was  a  period  of  experimentation  and  preparation  for 
the  rapid  expansion  that  began  about  mid-century.  If  one  considers  that 
the  modern  hotel  was  pioneered  by  Statler  in  1908,  then  the  hotel, 
likewise,  conforms  to  the  pattern,  despite  the  lavish  construction  of 
"grand  hotels"  in  the  1920's. 


Historical  Briefs 


35 


One  observes,  too,  that  all  of  these  forms  are  basically  enterprises  in 
which  land  is  improved  by  owners  for  the  occupancy  or  use  of  the  public 
in  exchange  for  market  recompense.  Thus,  they  are  all  real  estate 
undertakings,  though  it  may  seem  strange  to  think  of,  say,  hotelkeeping 
in  that  light.  Building  management  tends  to  be  thought  of  differently 
than  the  administration  of  land  that  is  all  on  a  level,  though  actually  it  is 
not  different.  Multi-story  buildings  are  but  so  much  increased  land  area 
stacked  vertically  in  one  place.  The  layers  being  sheltered  by  one  another 
and  screened  and  consequently  "indoor"  does  not  change  its  nature,  for 
land  use  must  be  planned  whether  the  land  is  dispersed  or  piled  up— 
whether  it  lies  in  one  plane  or  in  successive  planes. 

All  of  the  forms  show,  as  well,  a  trend  toward  larger  size  and  the 
inclusion  of  varied  land  uses.  With  variety  of  land  uses,  the  forms  require 
more  comprehensive  planning.  In  each  case,  such  coordination  or  control 
as  exists  is  possible  because  of  the  whole  being  at  some  time  held  in 
single  ownership,  either  during  the  initial  stages  of  planning  and 
development  or  continuing  over  the  life  of  the  enterprise. 

The  trend  to  greater  diversity  within  is  accompanied  by  a  trend  to 
greater  size  of  the  overall  project.  The  forms  are  merging  and  combining 
and  including  one  another  or  are  themselves  being  included  in  larger 
forms. 

Probably  of  greatest  significance  in  the  long  run  has  been  the  develop- 
ment of  profit-motivated  entrepreneurship  in  all  of  the  forms.  In  the 
early  stages,  each  was  developed  for  any  of  a  multiplicity  of  reasons, 
usually  not  for  its  own  sake  but  to  serve  some  other  end.  Its  value  to  its 
sponsor  was  indirect.  It  was  entrepreneured  for  almost  any  reason  except 
that  of  returning  a  direct  profit— to  increase  canal  or  rail  freight  tonnage; 
to  boost  passenger  traffic,  as  when  rail,  steamship,  and  air  lines  sponsor 
hotels  along  their  routes  or  at  destination  points  served  by  them;  to  bring 
more  employment  to  a  community;  to  broaden  the  tax  base  of  local 
government;  to  indulge  personal  vanity;  or  to  satisfy  a  humanitarian 
impulse.  Such  "subsidized"  operations  (so  called,  for  convenience, 
because  they  need  only  break  even,  at  best,  to  be  regarded  as  successful) 
are  of  continuing  importance  in  all  areas  of  proprietary  community 
development.  But  they  are  no  longer  the  most  characteristic  type. 
Increasingly,  such  projects  are  being  undertaken  by  private  real  estate 
developers  and  by  institutions  for  dollar  return. 

This  business  motive  is  significant  for  the  future  of  proprietary 
communities  in  general,  for  it  assures  that  they  can  be  self-sustaining 
and  hence  self-perpetuating.  By  requiring  the  community  owners  to  be 


36 


The  Art  of  Community 


responsive  to  changing  wants  in  the  market,  it  guarantees  that  flexibiUty 
so  necessary  for  the  continued  evolution  of  new  forms.  It  frees  them  from 
dependence  on  arbitrary  factors  for  their  form  or  scope  of  operation  or 
even  their  continued  existence.  It  frees  them  from  dependence  on  the 
needs  and  vulnerabilities  of  particular  other  enterprises  or  the  whims  or 
circumstances  of  individuals.*  Because  it  is  impersonal,  the  profit  motive 
lends  assurance  to  long-range  planning,  free  from  danger  of  shifting  or 
changing  objectives.  At  the  same  time  it  is  flexible  and  accommodating 
to  every  kind  of  activity  for  which  there  is  any  demand.  The  enterprise 
that  is  managed  for  profit  can  change  and  adapt  and  ever  serve  new 
functions  as  social  needs  arise  and  circumstances  change. 

The  late  writer,  Dorothy  Thompson,  in  1954  paid  a  very  beautiful 
tribute  to  the  impersonal  role  of  business  which  was  then  just  beginning 
to  move  into  the  area  of  large-scale  community  environments. 

Commercialism  has  been  blamed  for  most  of  the  faults  in  American  life,  and 
buying  and  selling  associated  with  rapacity,  its  principle  being  defined  as 
buying  cheap  and  selling  dear.  The  struggle  to  attract  the  public  eye  in  an 
advantageous  location  has  been  blamed  for  land  speculation,  the  inflation  of 
real-estate  values,  and  the  creation  of  commercial  and  residential  slums.  The 
commercial  spirit  has  been  described  as  the  antithesis  of  the  esthetic, 
defacing  beautiful  landscapes  with  screaming  billboards,  blotting  out  the 
sky  with  neon  signs. 

Commercialism  has  been  accused  of  cut-throat  competition,  and  socialists 
and  other  social  reformers  have  declared  private  commerce  incompatible 
with  cooperative  planning.  Thus  has  the  case  against  the  tradesman  been 
built  up. 

As  in  most  cases,  there  has  been  an  element  of  truth  in  the  accusations,  as 
usual  unbalanced  by  other  truths.  The  trader  has  been  the  great  opener-up  of 
the  world,  the  bridge  between  human  cultures,  and  between  country  and  city. 
He  has  been  the  purveyor  of  news  as  well  as  wares. 

More  than  any  other  group,  merchants  created  the  city  and  urban  civiliza- 
tion, with  all  its  graces  and  amenities.  One  of  commercialism's  greatest  recent 
accomplishments  is  Northland.  It  is  prosaically  described  as  a  "shopping 
center,"  and  that  is  what  it  is— together  with  several  other  things  besides.  It  is 
the  most  ambitious  of  such  mercantile  centers  in  America  or  the  world.  And  it 
is  as  new  as  the  twenty-first  century.  It  is  extremely  practical,  and  it  is 
perfectly  beautiful.  It  is  a  model  of  enlightened  planning,  and  of  social 
cooperation— between  merchants,  architects,  sculptors,  artists  and  civic- 
minded  citizens— and  it  is  entirely  the  creation  of  private  enterprise;  in  fact, 
the  creation  of  one  great  Detroit  department  store,  J.  L.  Hudson  Company,  a 

*It  is  not  insignificant  in  this  regard  that  company  towns  which  are  typically  subsidized 
communities,  have  long  been  objects  of  criticism.  For  a  discussion  of  company  towns,  see 
James  B.  Allen,  The  Company  Town  in  the  American  West,  Norman,  Oklahoma,  University 
of  Oklahoma  Press,  1966. 


Historical  Briefs 


37 


family  enterprise  which  has  capitaUzed  and  financed  it  to  the  tune  of  $25 
milUon  for  no  other  reasons  than  that  much-deplored  "profit  motive,"  the 
capacity  to  think  ahead,  and  the  very  human  desire  to  create  something 
admirable  and  worthy  of  repute. 

Northland— which  flies  its  own  flag,  a  white  (wind  rose)  sunburst  on  a  blue 
ground,  and,  of  course,  the  Stars  and  Stripes  as  well— is  not  one  market  but 
a  series  of  ten  connected  courts  (piazze  they  would  be  called  in  Italy), 
terraces,  malls  and  lanes.  The  largest  of  these— the  "courts"— like  the 
"terraces"  are  squares,  the  courts  open  on  one  side;  these  one  enters  from 
the  parking  lots.  Malls  are  twice  as  long  as  they  are  wide;  lanes  are  smaller. 
But  characteristic  of  all  of  them  is  that  their  central  areas  are  beautiful 
gardens.  Fountains  spray  water  into  the  air;  everywhere  there  are  solid  and 
handsome  oak  benches  where  one  can  sit  and  gossip  or  smoke,  and  in 
every  court  or  mall  a  delightful  piece  of  modern  sculpture  attracts  the  eye— 
and  suggests  meeting  places. 

These  centers  are  sponsored  and  financed  by  department  stores,  real  estate 
developers  and  builders.  [All  of  them]  refute  the  notion  that  civic  planning 
can  be  successfully  accomplished  only  by  government  and  supported  only 
by  government  subsidy.  There  is  room  in  America  for  all  sorts  of  planning, 
under  all  sorts  of  auspices;  the  question  is  only  who  will  have  the  greatest 
interest  in  doing  it  beautifully,  practically  and  economically. 

Given  not  so  very  much  time— and  no  war— America  promises  to  be  a  very 
beautiful  country,  not  only  because  of  its  beauties  of  Nature,  but  out  of  the 
imagination  and  initiative  of  its  citizens.  What  has  been  ill-done  will  be 
undone.  What  has  successfully  been  tried  will  be  improved.  America,  as 
Walt  Whitman  observed,  does  not  reject  the  past  but  translates  and  adapts 
it  to  modern  needs.  Its  spirit  looks  forward,  upward,  and  aspires.  And  like 
the  builders  of  Solomon's  Temple,  the  much-berated  shopkeeper  gilds  the 
columns  of  his  emporium  with  the  lily-work  of  art. 

Just  give  us  time,  freedom  and  peace.'" 


CHAPTER  3 


Trends  in  the  Real  Estate  Industry 


Adequate  real  estate  administration,  even  from  a  strictly  business  point  of 
view,  involves  thinking  of  real  estate  problems  primarily  as  a  matter  of 
community  organization,  with  proper  subordination  of  considerations 
relating  to  the  tangible  physical  facilities.  To  be  sure,  the  importance  of  the 
physical  facilities  is  not  to  be  depreciated,  but  physical  structures  and 
facilities  acquire  meaning  only  in  terms  of  people  and  the  interrelation  of 
people.  To  think  of  real  estate  exclusively,  or  even  primarily,  in  terms  of 
physical  structures  and  facilities  makes  it  a  meaningless  abstraction,  grossly 
deficient  in  terms  of  result-producing  potentialities. 

Marc  J.  Feldstein  and  Lyle  C.  Bryant 
Journal  of  Land  and  Public  Utility  Economics 

The  fact  that  they  are  communities  is  what  sets  apart  such  otherwise 
unlike  operations  as  hospitals,  theaters,  office  buildings,  trailer  parks  and 
so  forth,  and  unites  them  as  a  class.  This  is  an  insight  which  is  gradually 
coming  to  prevail  among  those  most  engaged  in  the  management  of 
income  properties.  But  because  its  recognition  is  still  relatively  new  to  the 
real  estate  industry,  it  may  be  helpful  to  develop  some  further  historical 
prespective  by  reviewing  the  role  of  the  industry  in  the  emergence  of 
proprietory  communities  from  the  end  of  the  nineteenth  century. 

The  development  of  real  estate  in  the  United  States  over  the  past 
eighty  years  exhibits  three  phases.  The  first  was  the  phase  of  "turning 
over"  properties— of  acquiring  land  for  resale  in  a  rising  market, 
subdividing  it,  and  then  disposing  of  it  in  as  many  small  pieces  as 
possible  through  a  public  promotion.  The  second  phase  was  like  the 
first,  except  that  the  land  was  improved  before  it  was  "turned  over." 
This  was  modified  speculation,  for  it  entailed  some  positive  production 
of  value  and  so  brought  some  stability  to  real  estate.  This  is  the  phase 
we  are  still  in,  the  era  of  the  developer-builder  and  the  planned 
subdivision.  But  there  are  strong  signs  that  the  real  estate  business  is 
moving  into  a  third  and  more  mature  phase,  a  phase  that  had  its 
beginnings  quite  early  and  is  characterized  by  retention  of  land 
ownership  in  whole  title  for  continuing  administration  for  income.  Here 
the  reverse  of  subdivision  occurs.  As  the  desirability  of  larger  sites  for 
effective  land  planning  and  management  is  recognized,  land  assembly 
instead  of  subdivision  becomes  the  goal. 


40 


The  Art  of  Community 


In  these  three  stages,  corresponding,  of  course,  to  periods  which 
overlap  and  blend  in  time,  the  real  estate  business  is  transformed  from  a 
purely  speculative  undertaking  dependent  on  an  advancing  market  for 
land— a  good  risk,  to  be  sure,  in  nineteenth-century  America— to  a 
positive  industry  planning  ahead  and  providing  services  for  long-term, 
stable  income. 

The  formula  of  buying  a  tract  of  land  and  offering  subdivided  lots  for 
sale  at  public  auction  was  reportedly  popularized  by  William  E.  Harmon, 
who  in  1887  originated  the  "purchase  contract,"  or  installment  plan  for 
buying  land.  Harmon  is  said  to  have  been  partly  motivated  in  his 
subdivision  promotions  by  a  vision  of  people  of  moderate  means  being 
enabled  to  live  in  semi-rural  surroundings  with  open  space  and  trees. 
Stanley  McMichael,  however,  gives  an  accurate  picture  of  what  the  buyer 
really  bought: 

The  earliest  developers  simply  purchased  a  tract  of  land  at  a  place  served 
with  suitable  transportation  facilities,  cut  streets  through  it,  marked  off  vacant 
lots  with  stakes,  plowed  ditches  along  the  sides  of  the  new  streets,  and 
proceeded  to  sell  the  lots,  leaving  to  the  purchasers  the  problems  of  getting 
pavements  past  their  doors,  sewers,  gas,  telephone,  water,  electric  service, 
and  such  other  conveniences  as  a  modern  home  demands. 

Harmon's  formula  paid  well.  As  others  were  quick  to  copy  his  lead, 
land  auctions  became  symbolic  of  the  rampant  land  speculation  associ- 
ated with  real  estate  operations  of  the  turn  of  the  century. 

It  is  not  widely  appreciated  to  what  extent  the  excesses  of  speculation 
and  the  difficulties  to  which  they  led  were  aggravated  by  municipal 
governments  assuming  responsibility  for  improving  new  land.  There  was 
no  way  for  a  buyer  to  know  immediately  and  exactly  what  financial 
obligations  he  was  undertaking,  since  he  could  not  anticipate  that  further 
costs  in  the  form  of  special  tax  assessments  might  or  might  not  be 
entailed  before  the  land  could  be  used.  Consequently,  many  purchasers 
were  led  into  financial  commitments  beyond  their  means,  especially  since 
the  public  auctions  appealed  to  that  class  of  people  least  experienced  in 
business  matters.  The  resulting  confusion  of  titles  and  tax  defaults  in 
many  cases  still  has  not  been  resolved,  so  that  an  enormous  acreage  of 
subdivided  land  lies  wasted  and  unused  to  the  present  day. 

The  second  phase  saw  a  merger  of  land  subdivision  with  the  building 
industry.  No  longer  merely  promoters,  the  new  builder-subdividers 
improved  the  lots  with  homes  and  thereby  realized  a  double  source  of 
profit  from  sales.  The  combination  worked  particularly  well,  since  the 
improved  lots  increased  the  value  of  neighboring  unimproved  lots.  This 


Trends  in  the  Real  Estate  Industry 


41 


took  some  of  the  speculation  out  of  the  subdivision  activity  by  actually 
creating  a  degree  of  land  value.  It  also  marked  the  beginning  of  the  real 
estate  business  as  a  positive  industry,  although  its  full  significance  was 
lost  on  the  run-of-the-mill  subdivider  who  still  thought  in  terms  of 
individual  lots.  Each  sale  for  him  was  a  separate  transaction,  unrelated  to 
all  the  rest. 

A  significant  advance  in  this  second  phase  occurred  around  the  turn  of 
the  century  when  some  thoughtful  and  farseeing  real  estate  men  made  a 
serious  attempt  to  identify  the  factors  that  cause  land  value.  Theirs  was 
the  first  thoughtful  approach  to  the  question  how  to  make  real  estate  a 
more  stable  and  profitable  business.  But  it  would  be  fifty  years  before  the 
important  answers  they  arrived  at  became  part  of  the  mainstream  of 
real-estate  thought  and  practice.  Their  most  important  discovery  was  that 
improvements  built  on  a  site  do  not  give  that  site,  merely  as  such,  any 
added  value.  Instead,  they  found  environment  to  be  the  determining 
factor.  It  was  location  with  reference  to  surrounding  land  uses,  both 
public  and  private,  that  gave  value  to  the  land  component  of  real  estate. 
The  idea  suggested  a  practical  application:  plan  a  whole  tract  as  an 
integrated  neighborhood  before  selling  any  parts  of  it.  Each  part  then 
will  increase  in  value  by  virtue  of  its  relation  to  the  other  parts.  Thus  was 
born  the  idea  that  good  land  planning  is  good  business. 

Other  individuals  had  been  interested  in  planning  subdivisions  before 
the  turn  of  the  century,  but  more  for  esthetic  and  social  than  for  business 
motives.  Among  these  was  Squire  Lorillard,  who  founded  the  socially 
famous  village  of  Tuxedo  Park,  New  York,  as  early  as  1885.  One  of  the 
nation's  very  earliest  was  Riverside,  Illinois,  built  in  1869  by  the 
Riverside  Improvement  Company.  But  few  people  appreciated  the 
importance  that  planning  was  to  have  for  the  future  of  real  estate  as  a 
business.  Among  the  first  who  saw  its  significance  for  real  estate 
generally,  the  first  who  looked  to  the  future  and  dedicated  their  careers  to 
demonstrating  that  good  planning  is  good  business,  were  the  group 
including  Edward  H.  Bouton,  of  Baltimore,  Hugh  Prather,  of  Dallas, 
Jesse  Clyde  Nichols,  of  Kansas  City,  and  Hugh  Potter,  of  Houston.  It  was 
these  men  who  later  founded  the  Urban  Land  Institute,  which  through 
research  and  information  exchange  provided  a  focal  point  for  the 
industry  in  advancing  good  land  planning.  The  work  of  these  men  in  the 
first  decades  of  this  century  is  represented  today  by  some  of  the  finest 
residential  neighborhoods  in  the  United  States.  Roland  Park  was  begun 
by  Bouton  in  1891.  It  was  followed  among  others  by  J.  C.  Nichols' 
Country  Club  District  in  1906  and  Hugh  Potter's  River  Oaks  in  1925. 
"Each  of  these  explorers  in  a  new  building  field  was  well  aware  of  the 


42 


The  Art  of  Community 


work  being  done  by  the  others.  They  wrote  to  each  other  and  met  at  each 
others'  homes  and  at  various  trade  conventions,  seeking  advice  and 
exchanging  information  based  on  their  individual  experiences."^ 

Not  only  did  these  pioneers  study  and  improve  upon  conventional 
street  patterns,  but  they  thoroughly  understood  the  principle  of 
complementary  land  uses.  Notable  among  their  contributions  was  the 
clustering  of  retail  business  properties  instead  of  leaving  them  to  grow 
up  randomly  in  a  neighborhood.  These  first  convenience  shopping 
centers  were  assets  to  the  residential  neighborhood  at  the  same  time 
that  the  latter  supplied  them  with  patronage.  Nor  was  the  need  for  park 
and  recreational  areas,  schools,  and  churches  overlooked. 

Besides  discovering  the  dependence  of  site  value  on  environment,  these 
early  community  builders  made  yet  another  contribution  to  real  estate 
theory  and  practice.  They  recognized  that  it  was  not  enough  merely  to 
create  a  planned  neighborhood.  Unless  some  provision  could  be  made 
for  continuing  control  and  coordination  of  land  uses  over  the  whole  area, 
it  would  begin  to  deteriorate  as  a  neighborhood  as  soon  as  the  sites  were 
sold  off  into  separate  ownerships.  The  relative  safety  of  the  buyer's 
investment  in  years  to  come  was  thus  recognized  as  a  further  important 
component  of  land  value.  Consequently,  a  great  deal  of  thought  and  time 
went  into  efforts  to  devise  adequate  means  of  assuring  continuing  area 
control.  In  the  cities,  already  divided  into  multiple  ownerships,  growing 
congestion  and  blight  were  drawing  attention  to  much  the  same  problem 
and  demanding  solutions  there  as  well  as  in  the  planned  subdivisions. 

Two  types  of  land  controls  were  experimented  with  throughout  this 
second  phase  of  real-estate  development.  One  was  the  protective 
covenant,  which  can  be  initiated  at  any  time  that  the  land  is  still  held  in 
one  ownership  before  being  subdivided.  The  other  was  zoning,  devised 
for  situations  in  which  the  land  has  already  been  subdivided.  In  the  case 
of  covenants,  restrictions  as  to  how  the  land  shall  be  used  are  incorpo- 
rated into  the  deed  that  is  passed  to  the  buyer.  Covenants,  therefore,  are 
private  agreements  between  buyer  and  seller.  Zoning  is  an  extension  of 
the  police  power  of  the  municipality. 

The  question  of  firm  but  flexible  land  controls  has  been  one  of  the  most 
difficult  and  persistent  questions  of  twentieth-century  real  estate.  Neither 
protective  covenants,  which  were  first  pioneered  extensively  in  Roland 
Park,  nor  zoning,  adopted  first  by  New  York  City  in  1916,  are  satisfac- 
tory solutions.  Neither  is  sufliiciently  flexible  or  dependable.  As  John 
Mowbray,  a  past  president  of  the  Urban  Land  Institute,  observed  about 
zoning  at  an  Architectural  Forum  symposium. 


Trends  in  the  Real  Estate  Industry 


43 


They  tend  to  be  fixed  restrictions  and  too  inflexible;  they  can  be  repealed  at 
the  next  vote;  they  are  unwieldy  ("think  of  waiting  for  a  council  meeting 
every  time  you  want  to  make  a  curb  cut");  and  moreover,  "you  can  have  an 
actual  nuisance  and  still  be  legal." 

Considerably  more  success  has  been  had  with  private  covenants,  which 
have  been  the  mainstay  of  the  best  postwar  land  planning  and  develop- 
ment. But  the  National  Association  of  Home  Builders  notes  their 
drawbacks: 

One  of  the  least  considered  and  weakest  points  in  protective  covenants  .  .  . 
has  often  been  the  lack  of  an  agency  representing  the  home  owners  as  a 
whole,  to  see  to  it  that  the  covenants  are  observed.  Quite  often  the  individual 
property  owner  hesitates  to  call  attention  personally  to  an  infraction  of  the 
rules  by  a  neighbor. .  .  . 

Ineffectiveness  of  private  covenants  can  be  traced  in  many  instances  to  the 
failure  to  provide  specifically  for  a  continuing  and  effective  organization  to 
which  the  powers  and  duties  set  up  under  the  covenants  may  be  assigned. 

Architectural  Forum  also  observes, "Restrictions  are  more  readily 
placed  in  leases  than  in  deeds  where  they  cannot  be  enforced  without 
policing  a  vanished  interest."'' 

Alternative  to  either  private  covenants  or  zoning,  leasehold  affords  an 
ideal  means  of  land  control,  and  one  wonders  why  the  real  estate  industry 
has  been  slow  to  recognize  this.  Part  of  the  reason  for  its  slowness  may  be 
that  in  the  United  States,  historically,  the  owner  of  rented  real  estate  was 
little  else  than  a  rent  collector.  Until  recently,  he  scarcely  knew  that  his 

!  real  estate  interest  might  involve  any  more.  He  was  satisfied  to  leave  to 
the  tenant  all  major  management  responsibilities,  including  sometimes 

I  even  the  liability  for  repairs,  property  taxes,  and  insurance.  This  is 
substantially  the  "net  lease"  arrangement  that  still  prevails  for  most 

I  downtown  real  estate.  The  landlord  was  commonly  thought  of  as  the  heir 
of  privilege,  the  passive  recipient  of  "unearned  increment."  He  was  not 
thought  of  as  being  in  the  active  role  of  a  businessman,  nor  did  he 
conceive  of  himself  in  this  light.  For  in  the  nineteenth  century,  the 
majority  of  those  who  owned  property  owned  it  for  their  own  use.  Those 
who  owned  property  as  an  investment  normally  expected  to  realize  their 
profit  from  resale  rather  than  continuing  administration.  Seldom  did 
rental  property,  in  any  case,  yield  more  than  supplemental  income  to  its 
owner,  so  that  he  was  seldom  in  a  position  to  give  his  undivided  attention 
to  its  administration. 

It  is  thus  understandable  why  the  traditional  owners  of  real  estate  did 
not  perceive  the  advantages  of  leasehold  as  an  effective  tool  for  land 


44 


The  Art  of  Community 


administration.  They  were  not  looking  in  that  direction,  as  were  Bouton 
and  others  who  not  only  were  serious  entrepreneurs  but  also  had  been 
studying  the  very  question  of  land  controls.  With  such  men  as  these,  it  is 
less  readily  understood.  However,  it  is  also  true  that  their  basic  orienta- 
tion was  toward  resale  for  capital  gain  rather  than  toward  long-term 
investment. 

A  more  important  reason  why  Bouton  and  others  overlooked  the  value 
of  leasehold  as  an  administrative  tool  may  have  been  that  they  were 
developing  residential  properties,  and  the  American  public  has  long  had 
a  romantic  notion  about  individual  home  ownership.  This  is  probably 
due  to  the  social  prestige  that  historically  has  attached  to  land  ownership 
and  to  the  low  prestige  of  tenancy  on  the  Continent,  which  was,  indeed, 
quite  often  insecure  in  the  unbusinesslike  past  of  real  estate.  Moreover, 
real  estate  was  only  just  beginning  at  the  turn  of  the  century  to  offer 
apartment  rental  housing.  It  would  scarcely  have  seemed  a  likely 
proposition  to  the  subdividers  to  offer  leased  homesites,  had  it  even 
occurred  to  them.  The  tide  has  turned,  however,  in  commercial  realty, 
and  today's  trend  toward  leasing  consumer  and  capital  property  of  all 
kinds  can  be  expected  to  extend  into  residential  realty  as  people  find 
more  and  more  that  they  can  be  assured  the  full  use  of  property  without 
having  to  assume  in  addition,  the  responsibilities  of  ownership.  There  is 
already  full  acceptance  of  leased  home  sites  in  mobile  home  communi- 
ties, some  of  which  will  inevitably  carry  into  others  forms  of  modular 
housing  developments. 

As  the  twentieth  century  opened,  most  of  those  people  in  the  United 
States  who  had  any  interest  in  real  estate  fell  into  one  of  two  categories. 
The  larger  category  included  those  who  were  accustomed  to  owning  real 
estate  but  not  to  managing  it  in  a  business-like  fashion.  Prominent 
among  these  were  owner-occupiers  whose  properties  yielded  no  rent 
incomes.  The  other  category  included  the  aggressive  business  element  in 
real  estate,  consisting  of  those  who  actively  traded  in  land  as  speculators 
and  subdividers.  Among  this  latter  group  were  the  men  who  were 
discovering  sound  principles  of  land  planning  as  an  aid  to  sales.  Neither 
group  as  yet  had  any  appreciable  experience  with  the  on-going,  produc- 
tive administration  of  real  estate. 

In  the  second  decade  of  the  century,  however,  some  changes  occurred 
that  promised  to  bring  together  these  two  traditions  or  streams  of  real 
estate  practice.  The  market  for  rental  housing  in  single-family  and  two-, 
three-,  and  four-flat  structures  began  after  1910  to  give  way  to  large 
multi-apartment  buildings.  Except  for  hotels,  these  apartment  buildings. 


Trends  in  the  Real  Estate  Industry 


45 


together  with  office  and  loft  buildings,  were  the  first  important  new  kinds 
of  multiple-tenant  income  properties  requiring  the  services  of  special- 
ized management.  The  ensuing  decades  witnessed  the  rapid  development 
of  multiple-occupancy  income  properties  of  all  kinds,  and  the  need  for 
specialized  management  services  grew  accordingly. 

An  important  event  in  the  appraisal  field,  one  of  the  growing  areas  of 
specialized  competence  in  real  estate,  was  the  substitution  of  the  income 
approach  to  valuation  for  the  traditional  replacement-less-depreciation, 
or  "bricks  and  mortar,"  approach.  The  newer  method  of  valuation 
capitalized  the  net  income  yield  of  the  property.  Outstanding  in  early 
appraisal  work,  Frederick  Babcock  wrote  in  1932,  "The  future  income 
stream  ...  is  certainly  the  very  basis  of  transactions  which  concern  real 
estate  values."'  The  older  approach  was  suited  to  the  time  when  it  was 
assumed  that  vertical  improvements  on  sites,  rather  than  lateral  im- 
provements surrounding  them,  determined  their  value.  The  new  income 
approach  allows  for  both.  It  also  allows  for  a  new  factor  which  is 
beginning  to  be  recognized  as  an  additional  determinant  of  the  value  of 
improved  properties,  namely,  management. 

The  use-value  concept  is  not  unique  to  real  estate.  As  E.  F.  Hutton  and 
Company  observes  in  its  Market  and  Business  Survey, 

The  lease  represents  a  departure  from  the  traditional  concept  of  asset 
ownership,  as  it  involves  only  its  use  for  a  specified  time.  There  is  evidence 
that  this  use-value  concept  is  gaining  acceptance  in  other  areas  of  the 
economy  as  well.  The  stock  market  may  well  have  given  a  dramatic 
demonstration  of  its  prophetic  qualities  when  it  abandoned  the  asset  value 
theory  of  establishing  value  and  adopted  the  price-times-earnings  multiple. 
The  switch  to  valuing  a  company  by  its  earning  power  rather  than  by  its 
assets  is  a  good  example  of  the  use-value  concept  in  action. 

The  emphasis  on  earnings  in  property  valuation  focused  attention  on 
planning  and  management.  With  the  growth  of  income  properties  and 
the  consequent  emphasis  on  management,  real  estate  administration  was 
on  the  way  to  becoming  an  industry.  At  first  it  was  confined  to  small  lots, 
but  the  1920's  onward  saw  a  steady  increase  in  the  size  of  building  lots, 
reflecting  greater  efficiencies  in  land  use. 

The  steady  growth  of  income  properties,  the  increasing  competence  of 
appraisal  and  management,  and  a  more  general  sophistication  in  land 
use,  as  evidenced  in  the  planned  subdivision,  the  larger  lot,  and  the 
search  for  neighborhood  land  controls,— all  these  changes  made  real 
estate  increasingly  attractive  to  investors.  Consequently,  long-term 
capital  financing  became  more  and  more  available  for  real  estate 
purposes.  The  war  postponed  development,  but  by  1950  circumstances 


46 


The  Art  of  Community 


were  right  for  an  enormous  growth  of  commercial  real  estate.  Not  only 
was  financing  available  from  institutional  sources,  especially  insurance 
companies,  but  new  tools  of  investment  and  finance  were  developed,  such 
as  syndication  and  sale-lease-back  arrangements. 

The  decade  of  the  1950's  provided  the  first  unmistakable  evidence  of 
merger  between  the  important  new  streams  of  real  estate  practice- 
integrated  land  planning  and  property  management,  the  one  developed 
originally  as  an  aid  to  subdivision  sales  and  the  other  for  the  manage- 
ment of  buildings.  Subdivision  into  small  management  parcels  began  to 
edge  toward  obsolescence  so  far  as  progressive  practice  in  real  estate 
development  was  concerned.  For  the  first  time,  a  trend  toward  the 
retention  of  large-scale  developments  in  single  ownership  for  on-going 
production  of  income  was  discernible. 

It  is  nevertheless  premature  to  call  the  period  since  mid-century  the 
"era  of  the  planned  community,"  as  has  been  popular  in  some  of  the 
media.  For  despite  the  comprehensive  scope  of  many  modern  land 
developments,  so  long  as  projects  continue  to  be  subdivided,  they  are 
planned  mainly  for  the  present  and  inadequately  for  the  future.  Obsoles- 
cence begins  with  their  subdivision  into  parts.  Richard  RatclifTs  observa- 
tion bears  repetition:  "Once  the  lots  have  been  sold  off  into  individual 
ownership,  even  a  few  of  them,  replanning  and  resubdividing  become 
virtually  impossible."  Yet  continual  replanning  is  needed  for  a  viable 
community,  for  "the  needs  of  urban  society  for  the  services  of  land  are  in 
constant  flux;  .  .  .  buildings  and  street  patterns  and  space  relationships  of 
land  uses  become  obsolete  and  ineflficient  with  the  changing  nature  of 
demand."' 

Nor  is  the  incentive  of  the  subdivider  conducive  even  to  the  best  of 
present  planning.  For  as  long  as  lots  are  produced  for  sale  rather  than  for 
income,  it  will  be  sufficient  that  development  produce  a  salable  article. 

The  significance  of  the  phrase,  "era  of  the  planned  community,"  is  that 
land  development  is  now  envisioned  in  large,  comprehensive  projects.  A 
number  of  large  complexes  have  been  completed  in  both  the  United 
States  and  Canada,  scores  are  under  construction,  and  many  more  are  on 
the  drawing  boards.  Each  of  these  developments  embraces  a  wide  range 
of  land  uses.  Dallas'  Exchange  park,  for  example,  is  described  as: 

the  nation's  first  completely  integrated  and  weather-controlled  business 
community.  Included  in  the  Park  are  such  facilities  as  a  bank,  an  insurance 
building,  a  department  store,  a  medical  research  center,  retail  shops  and 
office  buildings,  multi-level  parking  facilities,  and  a  hotel. 


Trends  in  the  Real  Estate  Industry 


47 


Comfort-minded  developers  have  made  provision  to  have  all  units  of  the 
project  connected  by  air-conditioned  malls  or  pedestrian  streets  to  create  a 
completely  weather-controlled  city. 

Don  Mills,  near  Toronto,  and  Kitimat  in  British  Columbia,  are 
outstanding  examples  of  whole  new  planned  communities  in  Canada. 
Projects  in  the  United  States  include  Columbia,  Maryland;  Reston, 
Virginia;  Roosevelt  Field  and  Sterling  Forest  in  New  York;  Prudential 
Center  in  Boston;  Science  City  near  San  Antonio;  Empire  Central, 
Southland  Center,  and  Exchange  Park  near  Dallas;  and  University  City, 
California  City,  Conejo  Valley,  Laguna  Niguel,  and  Century  City  in 
California. 

A  significant  feature  of  these  large  developments  is  that  many  contain 
areas  carefully  planned  for  retailing,  commercial,  or  industrial  func- 
tions, and  these  areas  are  being  kept  intact  as  functional  units  in  order 
to  benefit  from  proprietary  administration.  Only  in  a  few  instances, 
however,  are  entire  projects,  such  as  Prudential  Center  in  Boston, 
Sterling  Forest  in  New  York,  and  the  Century  City  development  in 
California,  to  remain  in  unit  ownership  and  be  managed  on  a  leasehold 
basis. 

Throughout  the  United  States  and  Canada,  the  movement  of  many 
kinds  of  retail  stores,  warehouses,  ofl[ice  buildings,  light  industry  and 
research  facilities  is  to  planned  developments;  in  1968,  over  forty  per 
cent  of  the  total  retail  trade  of  the  two  countries  was  transacted  in 
shopping  centers. " 

This  transformation  in  real  estate  is  just  one  facet  of  a  more  general 
trend  in  recent  centuries  toward  increasing  specialization  of  ownership 
and  the  organization  of  capital  property  of  many  kinds  into  large  service 
units  under  unified  proprietary  administration.  One  characteristic  of 
economic  progress  everywhere  has  been  the  progressive  specialization 
and  development  of  the  ownership  role,  the  progressive  diff"erentiation  of 
ownership  from  use.  Property  in  land  is  the  most  recent  class  of  property 
to  manifest  this  ubiquitous  trend  of  civilization.  As  lately  as  1953, 
James  C.  Downs,  Jr.,  observed  that 

...  in  the  past  fifty  years  there  has  been  a  technological  revolution  in  both 
production  and  operation  of  virtually  everything  except  real  estate.  The 
management  of  business  has  advanced  tremendously  through  the  application 
of  systematic,  planned  operations,  with  emphasis  on  looking  into  the  future 
and  thinking  ahead  as  well  as  maintaining  careful  selective  controls  on 
present  activities.  It  is  hard  to  realize  that  cost  controls,  personnel  manage- 
ment, widespread  advertising,  product  design  and  research,  careful  public 


48 


The  Art  of  Community 


relations,  and  technical  management  devices  such  as  IBM  machines, 
accounting  and  calculating  machines  ...  are  all  the  recent  products  of  a  new 
approach  to  running  business.  However,  this  approach  has  not  been  widely 
applied  to  the  operation  of  real  property.  Even  today,  many  property 
managers  are  merely  custodians  .  .  .  instead  of  planning  ahead  for  the  best 
possible  use  of  their  properties. 

Signs  of  the  "new  approach"  were  beginning  to  appear  even  as  Downs 
wrote,  and  today  real  estate  is  undertaking  for  the  first  time  the 
systematic  production  of  land  services  on  a  large  scale.  No  longer  may 
one  say,  as  did  a  speaker  at  a  symposium  just  two  years  after  Downs' 
article  appeared,  that  "not  being  manufacturable,  environment  has 
seldom  been  the  subject  of  organized  interest." Real  estate  today  is 
rapidly  developing  into  the  one  industry  whose  strict  concern  is  the 
production,  distribution,  and  maintenance  of  human  environment. 


tt 

(C 

ti 
I 

01 

Slli 

[fl 

?( 


CHAPTER  4 


Narrowing  the  Field 
of  Community  Types 

As  was  seen  earlier,  a  varied  assortment  of  special  situations  fit  the 
definition  of  community,  ranging  from  private  homes  to  theaters  and 
even  passenger  trains  and  buses  under  certain  conditions.  It  remains  to 
devise  a  way  of  conceptually  handling  this  diversity  of  special  forms  and 
to  identify  some  of  the  significant  variables. 

In  making  a  classification  of  communities,  the  first  distinction  can  be 
drawn  between  those  communities  in  which  the  private  areas  are 
administered  under  separate  and  diverse  ownerships  and  those  in  which 
the  land  is  organized  in  single  title.  The  former,  in  which  there  is  a 
multiplicity  of  ownerships,  may  be  either  a  subdivision  or  a  condomin- 
ium. The  class  of  subdivisions  includes  most  modern  towns  and  cities.  A 
condominium  differs  from  a  simple  subdivision  in  that  the  common 
areas  are  owned  and  administered  by  a  corporation  or  other  association 
made  up  of  the  owners  of  the  diverse  lots,  with  control  proportional  to 
such  ownership.  Like  the  cooperative,  a  condominium  requires  different 
management  skills  and  more  effort  to  operate  than  an  income  property 
of  comparable  size.  A  condominium  is  a  borderline  proprietary  commu- 
nity; because  of  its  fractionated  ownership,  it  trembles  on  the  verge  of 
sovereignty.  It  crosses  the  line  when  the  owners'  association  can  legally 
compel  payment  of  dues  at  rates  which  are  determined  by  a  majority  or 
other  fractional  vote  of  the  owners. 

Confining  the  discussion  now  to  communities  with  undivided  owner- 
ship, an  initial  distinction  can  be  drawn  between  those  communities  in 
which  the  occupants  of  the  private  portions  pay  no  rent  for  their 
occupancy  but  remain  occupants  solely  at  the  pleasure  of  the  owner,  and 
those  communities  in  which  it  is  customary  to  pay  rent.  The  latter  are  the 
main  concern  of  this  book.  They  include  the  class  of  properties  known  in 
real  estate  as  multiple-occupancy  income  properties,  and  it  is  here  that 
spectacular  developments  in  proprietary  community  are  taking  place. 
Older  and  more  widespread  in  our  society,  and  functioning  to  give 
suitable  environment  for  many  necessary  kinds  of  activities,  the  non- 
rental  type  of  community  will  in  no  sense  be  rendered  obsolete  by  the 
growth  of  rental  communities  but  will  be  afforded  greater  scope  in  the 
new  developments. 


50 


The  Art  of  Community 


There  are  a  number  of  important  differences  between  rental  and  non- 
rental  communities.  The  first  is  that  the  occupants  of  the  latter  always 
have  an  additional  relationship  to  the  owner,  such  as  that  of  customer, 
employee,  or  guest,  that  takes  precedence  over  their  status  as  a  tenant. 
When  this  other  relation  is  a  contractual  relation,  as  opposed  to  a  guest- 
host  or  kinship  relation,  then  either  the  owner  or  the  tenant  may  be  the 
party  of  the  first  part.  Examples  are  the  coffee  house,  in  which  the  owner 
serves  refreshments  to  the  tenant,  or  the  factory,  in  which  the  tenant 
performs  services  for  the  owner. 

In  the  non-rental  community,  moreover,  the  owner  never  fully  gives  up 
his  own  right  of  access  to  the  private  portions.  The  distinction  between 
private  and  common  areas  is  less  sharply  drawn.  Occupancy  is  more  in 
the  nature  of  a  privilege  than  a  contracted  right.  Occupants  have  the 
status  of  invitees. 

Finally,  the  non-rental  community  yields  no  return,  except  as  it  may 
enhance  some  other  income-producing  activity.  It  is  therefore  a  subsi- 
dized community.  Rental  communities  on  the  other  hand  are  income- 
producing  and,  as  such,  ordinarily  self-sustaining  (although  a  minority 
even  of  these,  operated  for  purposes  other  than  return  on  real-estate 
investment,  may  be  subsidized).  The  objective  is  to  optimize  the  total 
environment  of  each  site  within  a  system  of  sites  in  order  to  maximize 
the  combined  rent  they  will  command. 

Rental  income  communities  are  fortunate  in  a  special  way.  Their 
income  affords  a  quantitive  measure  of  the  successful  functioning  of  the 
community,  a  standard  not  available  in  other  kinds  of  communities, 
where  the  search  for  such  a  measure  has  engaged  the  thought  of  social 
scientists  since  Emile  Durkheim's  work  of  more  than  half  a  century  ago. 
Pathology  is  signaled  by  a  declining  income  line.  The  public  administra- 
tion must  generate  rentals  at  a  level  above  the  break-even  point  for  the 
community  to  be  viable. 

Its  flexibility  of  land  administration  by  virtue  of  the  unitary  title,  and 
the  fact  that  it  is  self-sustaining  in  its  own  right  rather  than  being  an 
appendage  of  another  activity,  gives  the  rental  community  a  viability 
that  other  kinds  of  communities  lack.  It  provides  out  of  its  earnings  for 
its  own  maintenance  and  eventual  replacement.  On  the  other  hand,  it 
readily  accommodates  within  itself  the  non-rental  and  subsidized 
communities  which  are  an  integral  and  important  part  of  society.  As  it 
evolves  favorable  and  diverse  environments  for  many  kinds  of  human 
activities,  the  rental  community  develops  more  and  more  its  inherent 
capability  of  accommodating  the  whole  range  of  human  purposes  and 
needs. 


Narrowing  the  Field  of  Community  Types 


51 


In  addition  to  thie  basic  distinctions  drawn  above  and  outlined  in 
Figure  1,  as  specialized  communities  of  all  kinds  differentiate  to  meet  the 
requirements  of  the  activities  of  their  occupants,  they  display  further 
differences  that  pertain  to  form  and  operation  rather  than  to  tenure. 
Prominent  among  these  are  the  distinctions  of  size,  discontinuity,  and 
degree  of  transience  of  population. 

Size  is  an  important  consideration  for  the  operation  of  any  enterprise. 
This  is  evidenced  by  the  standard  divisions  of  hotels,  shopping  centers, 
and  other  forms  by  size  classes  according  to  their  economics  of  opera- 
tion. Also,  with  increasing  size  the  ecology  of  an  enterprise  becomes 
complex.  Larger  hotels  and  shopping  centers  serve  as  social  and  cultural 
centers  for  the  surrounding  population,  transcending  in  kind  as  well  as  in 
degree  the  limited  functions  of  the  wayside  inn  or  the  neighborhood 
convenience  center. 

Some  communities  are  intermittent.  A  theater  is  discontinuous  be- 
tween performances,  as  are  passenger  trains,  buses,  and  planes  between 
runs,  or  a  private  home  when  the  family  is  out.  An  office  building  or  a 
shopping  center  is  empty  at  night;  the  community  dissolves  until 
morning  when  it  forms  again.  Other  communities,  though  not  discontin- 
uous, have  regular  ebb  and  flow,  such  as  the  hotel,  which  peaks  at  night 
and  is  relatively  deserted  by  day. 

Population  transience  is  an  important  variable.  The  basic  difference 
between  the  hotel  and  the  apartment  house  is  frequency  of  population 
turnover,  and  many  operational  differences  between  the  two  can  be 
related  to  this  fact.  There  are  similar  differences  between  wayside  and 
terminal  accommodations  within  the  hotel  industry  itself.  Residential 
and  recreational  communities  as  a  group  exhibit  a  higher  frequency  of 
turnover  than  do  business  communities,  whose  tenants  make  a  greater 
investment  in  fixtures  and  naturally  try  to  stay  in  the  location  where  they 
have  become  known  to  their  customers. 

Three  kinds  of  communities  that  illustrate  some  of  these  latter 
distinctions  are  the  theater,  the  passenger  train,  and  the  restaurant.  All 
are  intermittent  communities.  Each  has  some  unusual  feature  that  makes 
it  an  interesting  case. 

The  theater  is  a  rental  community  in  which,  during  performances,  the 
seats  define  private  spaces  and  the  aisles  and  lobby  are  common  areas. 
The  most  prominent  public  service  is  the  stage  or  screen  entertainment, 
although  the  services  also  include  provision  of  shops  and  concessions, 
sanitary  facilities,  landscaping  in  the  lobby  and  elsewhere,  and  con- 
trolled lighting  and  climate,  not  to  mention  the  presence  of  ushers  to 


52 


The  Art  of  Community 


I 

Whole  ownership 


Rent  payment 


Buyer-Seller 
Restaurant 


Self-Sustaining 

Apartment  building 
Hotel-Motel 
Industrial  Estate 
Marina 

Medical  Clinic 
Mobile-home  park 
Office  building 
Science-research  center 
Shopping  center 


Divided  ownership 

Subdivision 
Cities 

Condominium 


No  rent  payment  (subsidized) 


\ 

Employee-Employer 

Store 
Office 
Factory 


Subsidized 


Company  town 
Cooperative 


Guest-Host 
Home 


Trend  away  from  specialization 
toward  complementary  land  uses 
in  planned-unit  development 


Future? 


Fig.  1.  Classes  of  Community 


Narrowing  the  Field  of  Community  Types 


53 


escort  people  to  where  they  want  to  go,  to  keep  aisles  clear,  and  to 
maintain  good  order.  Even  these  do  not  exhaust  the  list  of  services,  for 
the  responsibility  of  a  theater  manager  to  his  patrons  is  diffuse  and 
complex.  Since  the  theater  is  dedicated  to  passive  recreation,  there  is  a 
minimum  of  tenant  interaction.  Neighbors  enjoy  easements  across  parts 
of  one  another's  property  to  gain  access  to  their  own.  Mores  include 
prohibitions  against  obstructing  the  view  or  the  hearing  of  others  by 
wearing  hats  or  making  noise. 

The  passenger  train  resembles  a  hotel  operation.  Like  the  hotel,  it  is  a 
rental  community  providing  a  full  range  of  services  including  sleeping, 
bathing,  dining,  and  entertainment  facilities.  However,  the  principal  and 
most  remarkable  common  service  offered  by  the  train  management  is  a 
controlled  change  in  the  location  of  the  community  with  respect  to 
surrounding  communities.  Similar  observations  hold  for  ships,  aircraft, 
and  other  transportation  vehicles. 

The  restaurant  is  typically  a  non-rental  community  and  is  therefore— 
as  a  community— subsidized.  Booths  and  tables  are  the  private  areas; 
access  aisles,  decor,  and  availability  of  food  service  are  facilities  and 
services  to  be  enjoyed  in  common.  Occupancy  is  by  invitation  and  for  a 
limited  but  unspecified  length  of  time.  Such  space  is  not  ordinarily 
charged  for  unless  unusual  circumstances,  such  as  prestige  or  special 
entertainment,  make  it  necessary  to  impose  a  cover  charge.  A  cover 
charge  technically  shifts  the  restaurant  into  the  column  of  rental 
communities,  but  it  does  not  affect  its  subsidized  status  since  the  charge  is 
usually  nominal  and,  like  minimums,  is  primarily  for  the  purpose  of 
rationing  limited  available  space.  It  would  be  unusual  for  such  receipts  to 
represent  any  significant  return  of  income  on  the  real-estate  investment. 
The  environmental  services  in  a  restaurant  are  intended  to  attract 
patronage  for  a  food  and  drink  retailing  operation. 

A  final  point  of  difference  among  communities  that  might  be  touched 
upon,  although  it  raises  questions  that  are  outside  the  scope  of  this 
chapter,  is  the  extent  to  which  some  communities  are  specialized  to  a 
particular  kind  of  occupant  activity  while  others  are  generalized,  all- 
purpose  communities.  It  will  be  enough  at  present  to  observe  that  in 
contemporary  society,  proprietary  communities  thus  far  have  tended  to 
be  specialized  to  particular  functions.  There  are  few  examples  in  the 
modern  world  of  generalized  proprietary  communities.  Among  primitive 
societies,  on  the  other  hand,  generalized  proprietary  communities  are  the 
rule  rather  than  the  exception.  In  the  light  of  this  historical  contrast,  it  is 
intriguing  to  observe  and  reflect  on  today's  gathering  trend  toward 
general  and  complementary  land  uses  in  planned-unit  developments. 


CHAPTER  5 


Structure  and  Function 


The  interest  of  (land  owners)  is  strictly  and  inseparably  connected  with  the 
general  interests  of  the  society.  Whatever  either  promotes  or  obstructs  the 
one,  necessarily  promotes  or  obstructs  the  other.  When  the  public 
deliberates  concerning  any  regulation  of  commerce  or  police,  the 
proprietors  of  land  never  can  mislead  it,  with  a  view  to  promote  the  interest 
of  their  own  particular  order;  at  least,  if  they  have  any  tolerable  knowledge 
of  that  interest. 

Adam  Smith 
The  Wealth  of  Nations ' 

The  feature  that  most  readily  distinguishes  the  proprietary  community 
from  the  traditional  Western  community  under  sovereignty  is  the  single 
ownership  of  its  basic  realty.  This  structural  feature  is  not  the  only 
difference,  but  it  is  the  key  departure  to  which  is  tied  a  whole  series  of 
functional  changes  in  the  community.  As  land  title  is  fractionated,  there 
develops  a  tendency  toward  community  disorganization.  As  land  title  is 
organized,  there  develops  a  tendency  toward  more  effective  organization, 
reflecting  the  wider  scope  for  the  functional  role  of  real  estate. 

This  idea  will  be  taken  up  from  three  different  approaches,  first  by 
looking  at  the  effects  of  scattered  land  title  in  a  community,  then  by 
looking  at  a  model  of  the  economy  of  the  proprietary  community,  based 
on  integrity  of  land  title,  and  finally  by  examining  more  analytically  than 
heretofore  the  role  of  the  community  owner. 

The  Pattern  of  Subdivision 

The  traditional  Western  community  is  a  sovereign  community  in 
which  ownership  is  scattered  in  many  parts,  each  person's  interest  as  an 
owner  of  land  or  buildings  being  bound  up  with  that  particular  piece  of 
the  community  realty  which  he  himself  uses  as  owner  or  from  which  he 
derives  his  income.  Because  of  this,  a  conflict  of  interests  accompanies 
every  change  in  the  land-use  pattern  of  the  community.  This  conflict 
becomes  aggravated  in  times  of  accelerated  change.  The  source  of 
conflict  is  that  the  value  of  a  given  location  depends  on  surrounding 
accessible  land  uses,  both  public  and  private.  Each  change  in  land  use, 
therefore,  has  a  favorable  or  an  unfavorable  effect  on  the  value  of  its 


56 


The  Art  of  Community 


neighboring  sites.  As  Richard  Nelson  and  Frederick  Aschman  state 
succinctly  in  Real  Estate  and  City  Planning,  "...  each  unit  of  land  use  is 
dependent  for  its  function  on  other  units  of  land  use."^  The  dependence 
varies  inversely  with  the  size  of  the  site  in  question.  It  decreases  as  the 
site  becomes  larger  and  more  able  to  provide  its  own  environment  by,  on 
the  one  hand,  achieving  an  internal  balance  of  complementary  land  uses 
and  thereby  a  measure  of  independence  of  surrounding  sites  and,  on  the 
other  hand,  by  exerting  a  favorable  influence  on  the  course  of  develop- 
ment of  surrounding  properties. 

The  conflicts  of  interest  arising  from  divided  ownership  of  land  with 
consequent  identification  of  private  interests  with  parts  of  the  commu- 
nity rather  than  with  the  whole,  can  be  illustrated  by  a  characteristic 
situation.  Imagine  a  case,  such  as  happens  not  infrequently,  where  the 
owners  of  downtown  property  in  a  small  city  are  concerned  to  bring 
about  certain  community  improvements.  In  this  instance,  perhaps  they 
are  concerned  about  the  increasing  congestion  in  the  business  district 
which  is  making  it  progressively  difficult  for  people  to  get  downtown 
from  the  suburbs.  There  is  a  sense  of  urgency,  since  some  fear  that 
outlying  shopping  centers  will  be  built  and  may  divert  the  traffic 
permanently.  The  obsolete  street  system,  laid  out  a  century  before  for 
semi-rural  carriage  traffic,  still  sufficed  even  fifty  years  ago  when  the 
growing  population  came  on  streetcars  and  walked  to  their  destinations 
in  the  downtown  area.  But  when  everyone  began  driving  downtown  in  his 
own  automobile,  there  soon  were  not  enough  streets  to  handle  the  coming 
and  going,  much  less  to  move  or  park  the  cars  downtown.  Ideally,  the 
basic  street  pattern  should  be  entirely  revamped  and  the  downtown 
redesigned  as  a  regional  center  with  complete  community  facilities  and 
ample  parking.  At  the  very  least,  some  streets  should  be  widened  and 
more  parking  space  made  available. 

In  order  to  accomplish  at  least  the  minimum,  the  downtown  owners  in 
our  hypothetical  example  met  one  day  and  agreed  to  subscribe  for  a 
bond  issue  and  vote  the  necessary  tax  assessments  on  their  properties.  It 
was  an  auspicious  beginning.  But  when  it  came  to  the  point  of  carrying 
out  the  improvements,  they  found  their  interests  as  owners  inevitably 
opposed.  All  went  well  until  the  day  they  considered  which  side  of  the 
street  to  widen.  At  that  point,  enlightened  as  they  were,  and  with  the  best 
of  intentions,  they  found  themselves  poised  for  combat.  The  interest  of 
each  and  everyone  was  threatened.  Because  of  the  structuring  of  their 
interests,  each  had  to  insist  that  the  widening  take  place  on  the  other  side 
of  the  street.  When  it  came  to  parking  lots,  on  the  other  hand,  each 
wanted  them  on  his  side  of  the  Street  and  as  close  to  his  property  as 
possible— but  without  taking  any  of  his  property. 


Structure  and  Function 


57 


In  this  stalemate,  it  was  inevitable  that  someone  lose— all  of  the  town  if 
the  improvement  did  not  go  through,  or  else  one  or  more  of  the 
downtown  owners  who  would  be  deprived  of  their  personal  plans  for 
their  property.  The  end  result,  if  not  continued  and  worsening  blight, 
could  only  be  a  compromise  plan  that  would  not  represent  the  best 
available  thinking  for  the  future  growth  of  the  town,  and  in  which  much 
bitter  feeling  would  be  aroused  over  the  push  and  pull  leading  to  final 
determination  of  the  plan  and  to  the  eventual  abrogation  of  property 
right  of  some  of  the  residents. 

This  exemplifies  the  difficulty  attendant  on  any  community  develop- 
ment program  when  the  land  is  held  in  divided  ownership.  It  is  the  long- 
standing dilemma  of  traditional  communities  that  has  resulted  in  virtual 
paralysis  of  the  heartland  of  every  major  city.  This  is  the  dilemma,  at 
bottom,  of  effective  land  planning,  which  requires  that  some  areas  be 
used  less  intensively  (churches,  parks,  and  parking  lots)  and  some  more 
intensively  (high-rise  apartments  and  office  buildings)  in  order  to  raise 
the  value  of  the  property  as  a  whole.  So  long  as  individuals  have 
ownership  in  parts  less  than  the  whole,  their  interests  will  collide  with  the 
interests  of  others  and  with  their  common  interest  in  any  proposal  that 
would  affect  land  values  unevenly.  Yet,  to  avoid  such  measures  would  be 
to  throw  out  planning  or  coordination  of  land  uses  completely,  and  with 
it  ultimately  all  land  value.  The  habitual  course  is  to  continue  in 
stalemate  until  a  crisis  forces  a  solution  that  is  at  best  short  term  and 
achieved  only  at  questionable  social  cost  through  the  forcible  interven- 
tion of  an  agency  outside  the  system  of  contract  and  exchange. 

Aggravating  the  situation  further  is  the  absence  of  effective  leadership 
to  arbitrate  the  conflicts  or  to  salvage  the  best  of  the  bad  situation. 
Lacking  is  someone  who,  while  not  identified  with  any  special  interest 
within  the  community,  is  at  the  same  time  strongly  concerned  for  the 
success  of  the  community  as  a  whole. 

This  deficiency  shows  clearly  in  the  older  downtown  business  districts. 
It  shows  in  the  relative  inability  of  downtown  merchants,  as  compared 
with  merchants  in  shopping  centers,  to  cooperate  in  effective  group 
promotions,  to  coordinate  days  and  hours  of  store  openings,  to  make 
customer  referrals,  to  get  better  municipal  services,  and  to  pursue  other 
matters  of  common  concern.  All  parties  want  to  cooperate,  yet  they  often 
cannot  seem  to  "get  together"  as  they  feel  they  should;  the  situation  is 
very  much  like  a  meeting  without  a  chairman. 

This  and  other  problems  of  merchandizing  in  downtown  areas,  related 
largely  to  the  impasse  over  city  planning,  have  caused  downtown 
business  districts  to  lose  business  to  outlying  shopping  centers.  As  early 


58 


The  Art  of  Community 


as  the  period  1948-1954,  Manhattan  retail  sales  declined  by  three  per 
cent  in  adjusted  dollars,  and  pedestrian  counts  and  land  values  in  most 
downtown  areas  have  steadily  been  declining  for  many  years.  An  author 
writes  in  the  Journal  of  Property  Management, 

Today  it  is  very  difficult  in  a  great  many  cities  to  determine  the  value  of  real 
estate. .  .  .  When  a  vacancy  occurs  in  a  property  in  downtown  areas  in  various 
cities  today,  it  is  apt  to  stay  vacant  a  good  long  time.  Most  of  the  department 
stores,  most  of  the  chain  stores,  and  specialty  shops  are  looking  for  locations 
in  shopping  centers  in  preference  to  downtown.  Very  few  are  taking 
downtown  locations. 

Another  writer,  after  noting  such  discouragements  to  downtown 
shopping  as  charge  parking,  tough  police,  noncanopied  sidewalks,  snow 
accumulation,  traffic  snarls,  lack  of  landscaping,  dirty  curbs  and  side- 
walks, garish  signs  and  lack  of  area  store  directories,  observes  that  the 
chamber  of  commerce  "is  not  directed  to  retailing,  and  in  many  cases 
there  are  several  small  merchant  groups  that  are  loosely  organized, 
poorly  financed  and  inadequately  manned  in  the  effort  to  compete  with 
the  concerted  drives  of  organized  merchants  in  a  regional  center.""  The 
futility  of  attempting  to  locate  responsibility  in  the  downtown  business 
district  is  further  commented  on  in  a  planning  report  for  Richmond, 
California: 

Generally,  whenever  commercial  facilities  don't  measure  up  to  people's 
expectations  .  .  .  the  people  blame  the  merchants  individually  or  collectively. 
But  it  is  not  always  their  fault  .  .  .  Frequently,  many  people,  including 
businessmen,  criticize  property  owners  or  the  city.  It  is  not  always  their  fault. 
But  nevertheless  it  is  agreed  that  "they  ought  to  be  doing  something  about 
it."  Determining  just  who  the  "they"  is  and  what  the  "something"  is,,  is  not 
always  easy.  For  the  simple  facts  of  the  matter  are  that  the  problems  are 
often  beyond  the  scope  of  any  merchant,  or  any  property  owner,  or  any  group 
of  merchants  or  property  owners,  or  the  city. 

The  inability  of  downtown  merchants  to  "get  together"  is  commonly 
explained  as  a  deficiency  of  merchant  education,  combined  with  the 
drain  of  the  better  merchants  to  shopping  centers.  The  feeling  is  that, 
once  downtown  merchants  learn  and  practice  the  techniques  of  joint 
action  that  have  been  developed  in  centers,  they  will  close  the  present 
gap.  Some  downtown  groups  deserve  very  great  credit.  Meanwhile,  for 
the  nation  as  a  whole,  it  has  not  been  determined  whose  responsibility  it 
is  to  educate  the  downtown  merchants— though  downtown  department 
stores  are  assuming  some  of  the  leadership  role.  Moreover,  it  is  little 
appreciated  that  shopping  centers  are  only  at  the  beginning  of  their 
development  and  will  work  continuously  and  in  competition  with  one 
another  to  discover  new  ways  of  cooperation  as  they  improve  on  the  old. 


Structure  and  Function 


59 


Organization  requires  leadership,  and  the  downtown  of  a  city  lacks  the 
potential  leadership  that  is  built  into  the  shopping  center  situation  by 
virtue  of  the  single  landlord.  While  he  may  overstate  the  case,  a  regional 
shopping  center  director  in  an  interview  expressed  his  own  conviction  on 
the  subject  in  these  words: 

Probably  that  is  the  most  important  reason  for  the  expansion  of  shopping 
centers.  When  a  merchant  comes  into  a  center,  he  is  stepping  into  a  place 
where  he  is  buying  leadership.  That  is  the  whole  premise.  He  has  stepped  into 
something  where  leadership  exists  whether  he  realizes  it  or  not. 

Shopping  centers  show  neither  Main  Street's  paralysis  of  physical 
form,  due  to  conflicting  land  interests,  nor  the  disorganization  of  its  land 
users  due  to  the  absence  of  defined  leadership.  These  defects  have  been 
resolved  in  the  unified  ownership  of  the  shopping  center  and  the 
management  integrity  which  this  makes  possible.  Once  the  ownerships 
are  organized  as  participations  in  a  single  property,  it  becomes  the 
common  interest  of  the  owners  to  redevelop  and  manage  the  whole  as  a 
unit  in  the  most  productive  way,  even  to  replanning  the  formerly  fixed 
pattern  of  streets  and  common  areas.  It  becomes  their  single  interest  to 
provide  not  only  optimum  physical  environment,  but  optimum  social 
environment  as  well— through  an  effective  manager  who  can  serve 
inconspicuously  as  expediter,  peacemaker,  and  active  catalyst  to  promote 
the  freest  possible  conditions  for  the  occupants  to  pursue  their  respective 
interests. 

The  Economy  of  the  Proprietary  Community 

A  proprietary  community  is  distinctive  in  that  all  of  its  community 
functions  are  performed  through  proprietary  and  non-political  means, 
that  is  to  say,  through  ordinary  business  relations  of  the  marketplace. 
Every  proprietary  community  reflects  in  miniature  a  complete  economic 
system— a  society  in  microcosm.  Taking  for  a  model  a  completely 
generalized  (hypothetical)  proprietary  community,  one  can  analyze  its 
economy  in  the  following  way: 

The  market  is  the  outstanding  institution  of  process,  or  social  change, 
in  the  proprietary  community.  It  facilitates  the  performance  of  con- 
tracts—exchanges of  ownership  positions  with  respect  to  every  kind  of 
property— and  acts  as  the  social  metabolism  of  the  community. 

The  market  can  be  divided  for  analysis  into  submarkets  according  to 
the  class  of  property  or  services  dealt  with.  Thus  we  can  make  any 
number  of  divisions  of  the  market  according  to  our  purpose,  such  as  the 
land  market,  the  toy  market,  the  glass  goblet  market,  the  credit  market. 


60 


The  Art  of  Community 


the  nurse  market.  People  do  not  always  participate  in  the  same  market, 
nor  always  in  the  same  capacity,  as  seller  or  as  buyer,  but  each  partici- 
pates now  in  one  market,  now  in  another,  and  in  opposite  capacities  on 
different  occasions.  On  one  occasion  he  participates  as  a  provider,  on 
another  as  a  recipient  of  services,  now  relinquishing,  now  obtaining 
positions  with  respect  to  different  kinds  of  property. 

For  the  present  analysis,  only  two  subdivisions  of  the  market  need  be 
considered— that  of  space,  or  land,  use  and  that  of  every  other  kind  of 
property.  The  one  is  represented  by  the  inner  ring  in  Figure  2,  the  other 
by  the  outer. 

The  economic  activity  of  the  community  consists  of  markets.  People 
move  from  one  to  another  according  to  their  purposes  and  needs.  People 
who  on  one  occasion  interact  in  the  land  market  must  also  participate  on 
other  occasions  in  other  markets  and  in  opposite  roles.  Those  who  on  one 
occasion  give  land  services  must  on  other  occasions  receive  services  of 
other  kinds.  Thus  is  reciprocity  among  all  members  brought  about.  None 
can  operate  in  only  one  market,  or  on  all  occasions  as  a  buyer  or  as  a 
seller,  a  provider  or  a  recipient  of  services.  Each  person  in  our  model 
must  alternate,  now  giving,  now  receiving,  in  different  markets.  If  in  the 
diagram  in  Figure  2  a  larger  number  of  divisions  of  the  market  had  been 
made  and  were  represented  by  concentric  rings,  we  would  observe 
individuals  as  buyers  moving  about  a  great  deal  among  different  rings, 
but  as  sellers  or  suppliers  specializing  in  one  or  a  few. 

The  term,  services,  in  Figure  2  refers  to  the  service  of  allocation— the 
service  of  transferring  title.  For  one  discovers  on  examining  the  nature 
of  a  sale  that  what  is  sold  is  never  actually  the  thing  itself,  whether  goods 
or  services,  but  the  ownership,  or  the  social  jurisdiction,  over  the  thing.  It 
is  a  psychological  rather  than  a  physical  transaction.  As  Richard  Ratcliff 
observes  of  the  real  estate  market. 

In  its  popular  connotation,  the  term  "property"  refers  to  land  and  buildings 
in  the  case  of  real  property  and  to  various  movable  articles  in  the  case  of 
personal  property.  But  the  real  estate  market  deals  in  rights,  not  directly  in 
the  land  and  buildings  that  are  the  property  objects. ' 

It  is  this  service  of  transferring  jurisdiction  to  another— performing  a 
sale— that  commands  a  return  in  the  market.  Every  member  of  the 
community  is  a  buyer  and  a  seller  of  services,  the  service  in  every  case 
being  to  transfer  to  another  the  authority  to  commit  the  use  of  particular 
property,  whether  land,  material  goods,  credits,  or  imponderables  of 
various  kinds,  or  even  the  benefit  of  one's  own  judgment  or  skill.  The 
service  is  that  of  entitling  others. 


Structure  and  Function 


61 


Land  Market 


Owners 
of  Land 


Fig.  2. 

Reciprocity  Between  Owners  and  Users  of  Land  in 
the  Proprietary  Community 


62 


The  Art  of  Community 


The  diagram  as  a  whole  represents  not  a  division  of  the  population  but 
a  division  of  roles,  since  each  member  may  act  in  a  number  of  different 
roles  as  it  becomes  appropriate  from  time  to  time  for  him  to  do  so.  A 
person  may  occupy  all  three  roles.  He  may  rent  a  home  in  the  community 
and  thus  be  a  tenant,  participate  in  the  general  market  as  an  entrepre- 
neur (in  which  case  he  is  also  a  business  tenant)  or  as  an  employee  of  the 
owners  or  of  certain  other  tenants,  and  invest  his  earnings  in  shares  of 
the  enterprise  and  so  become  an  owner.  Figure  2  thus  depicts  relation- 
ships among  roles  rather  than  among  individuals  in  a  community— 
although  it  is  the  latter  at  any  given  moment  in  time. 

The  operation  of  the  model  is  as  follows: 

The  owners  of  land,  recruiting  employees  and  engaging  services  from 
the  general  (other-than-land)  market,  employ  these  resources  in  ways 
designed  to  facilitate  the  most  productive  use  of  the  community  sites  by 
the  land  users,  or  tenants.  To  the  degree  that  they  succeed,  then  out  of  the 
resulting  productivity  of  the  land,  the  tenants  are  enabled  to  give  tokens 
in  rent  for  so  much  space,  and  of  such  kind,  as  the  individual  sites  are 
worth  to  them  at  a  market  price  established  by  their  competitive 
offerings. 

With  these  tokens  (claims  on  services)  received  in  rent,  the  land  owners 
re-enter  the  general  market  in  either  a  private  or  a  bu.siness  capacity  and 
receive  services  from  the  tenants,  or  land  users,  for  which  they  now  give 
back  some  of  the  tokens  they  earlier  received.  Thus  do  the  tenants,  by 
now  providing  services  in  exchange  for  tokens,  redeem  their  tokens 
which  they  previously  issued  in  exchange  for  the  community  benefits 
they  received  through  their  occupancy  of  the  community  sites.  They  are 
glad  to  redeem  their  tokens;  that  is  what  they  are  in  business  to  do.  When 
the  token  is  redeemed,  the  exchange  between  landlord  and  tenant  is 
complete.  Until  the  landlord  entered  the  general  market  to  buy  services, 
the  completion  of  the  exchange  was  deferred  by  means  of  the  tokens  or 
counters— commonly  referred  to  as  money— which  kept  tally  of  how  much 
was  owing  in  services. 

The  operation  of  this  system  in  dynamic  equilibrium  can  be  traced  as 
well  in  the  other  direction.  The  land  owner,  in  providing  community 
services  and  accepting  tokens  for  rent  in  exchange,  is  redeeming  the 
tokens  he  earlier  issued  in  order  to  obtain  goods  and  services  in  the 
general  market.  The  cycle  is  perfect  and  reciprocal. 

It  begins  to  be  seen  how  proprietary  administration,  operating  on  a 
small  scale  in  countless  new  and  growing  community  enterprises,  fulfills 
amply  within  the  scope  of  these  operations  all  of  the  needs,  public  and 


Structure  and  Function 


63 


private,  of  community  life  and  therein  gives  intimations  of  a  total 
alternative  to  tax-supported  institutions,  whose  forms  have  ever  been 
debated  but  whose  premise  lay  for  centuries  unexamined. 

Role  of  the  Community  Owner 

No  immediate  change  would  be  perceptible  physically  if  at  one 
moment  the  land  in  a  community  were  owned  in  diverse  pieces  and,  at 
the  next,  in  a  form  of  undivided  interests.  But  over  time,  and  barring 
untoward  circumstances,  the  visible  consequences  of  such  a  change  would 
be  enormous.  The  change  would  largely  result  from  a  new  functional  role 
in  the  community,  the  role  of  the  now  integrated  proprietary  authority. 

Among  all  his  activities,  the  proprietor  in  his  capacity  merely  as 
proprietor  performs  a  single  service  in  the  market:  he  lets  the  use  of 
community  land.  All  else  that  he  does  is  directed  toward  making  this 
service  valuable  and  eagerly  sought  after.  His  objective,  therefore,  is  to 
make  the  community  a  productive  and  wholly  desirable  place  for  people 
to  live  and  carry  on  their  businesses. 

The  proprietor  builds  value  in  the  inventory  of  community  land  chiefly 
by  satisfying  three  functional  requirements  of  a  community  which  he 
alone  as  an  owner  can  adequately  fulfill:  selection  of  members,  land 
planning,  and  leadership.  Ordinarily  he  does  more  than  attend  to  these 
three  responsibilities  of  his  land  ownership,  just  as  the  real  estate 
subdivider  undertook  to  become  a  building  contractor  after  the  turn  of 
the  century,  and  today  may  see  additional  opportunities  in  the  gas  and 
electric  business.  But  these  three  are  basic  to  his  role  as  owner.  Moreover 
they  are  unique  in  not  requiring  expenditure  of  physical  effort.  They  are 
psychological  functions,  judgmental  rather  than  physical  in  nature.  They 
are  administrative  functions. 

The  first  two  functions,  membership  selection  and  land  planning,  are 
accomplished  by  him  automatically  in  the  course  of  determining  to 
whom,  and  for  what  purpose,  to  let  the  use  of  land.  The  third  function, 
leadership,  is  his  natural  responsibility  and  also  his  special  opportunity, 
since  his  interest  alone  is  the  success  of  the  whole  community  rather  than 
that  of  any  special  interest  within  it.  Assigning  land  automatically 
establishes  the  kinds  of  tenants  and  their  spatial  juxtaposition  to  one 
another  and,  hence,  the  economic  structure  of  the  community.  Leader- 
ship then  facilitates  community  functioning. 

In  planning  his  community,  it  is  desirable  that  the  owner  encourage  the 
most  intensive  use  of  the  land  that  the  technological  development  of 


64 


The  Art  of  Community 


society  will  allow.  Only  thus  can  he  maximize  his  over  all  rents.  Because 
of  the  interdependence  of  land  uses,  he  cannot  realize  this  maximum 
potential  in  a  community  of  any  considerable  size  by  assigning  all  the 
land  to  just  one  use,  such  as  residential  housing.  Residential  uses  need 
complementing  by  shops  and  professional  services,  recreational,  educa- 
tional, and  employment  facilities,  and  so  forth.  Businesses  of  all  kinds 
require  nearby  residential  areas  from  which  to  draw  customers  and/or 
employees,  besides  such  specialized  other  functions  as  wholesale  supply, 
warehousing,  and  distribution  facilities.  Each  land  use  requires,  directly 
or  indirectly,  and  in  differing  spatial  relation  to  it,  most  of  the  land  uses 
that  are  to  be  found  in  a  generalized  community. 

Each  land  use  in  turn  affects  the  highest  and  best  use  that  can  be  made 
of  other  sites;  and  it  affects  other  sites  unevenly,  depending  on  their 
location  relative  to  it  and  to  the  other  land  uses  in  the  community.  A  park 
is  of  greater  benefit  to  those  residential  sites  that  command  a  view  of  it 
than  it  is  to  sites  in  the  next  block,  and  its  benefit  continues  to  diminish 
thereafter,  modified  as  the  pattern  of  transport  may  make  it  more 
accessible.  A  druggist,  on  the  other  hand,  wants  to  locate  in  a  good 
residential  area,  but  not  bordering  a  park;  he  prefers  to  be  surrounded 
by  housing.  Thus  a  prime  residential  location  would  be  worth  less  to  him 
than  a  location  somewhat  less  than  prime  for  residential  purposes.  Like 
the  park,  the  availability  of  the  druggist's  services  .boosts  the  value  of 
surrounding  property  for  residential  use.  In  this  case,  however,  the 
greatest  benefit  may  be  to  space  located  a  short  distance  away  rather  than 
bordering  on  it.  The  availabiUty  of  employment  nearby— as  in  office 
buildings  or  in  light  or  heavy  industry— again  increases  the  desirability 
of  residential  property,  the  optimum  distance  varying  in  each  case  with 
their  relation  to  other  land  uses  and  the  kind  of  residential  neighbor- 
hood. Of  these  functional  interdependencies,  Richard  Ratcliff  observes, 

Each  parcel  of  land  occupies  a  unique  physical  relationship  with  every  other 
parcel  of  land.  Because  in  every  community  there  exists  a  variety  of  land  uses, 
each  parcel  is  the  focus  of  a  complex  but  singular  set  of  space  relationships 
with  the  social  and  economic  activities  that  are  centered  on  all  other  parcels. 
To  each  combination  of  space  relationships,  the  market  attaches  a  special 
evaluation,  which  largely  determines  the  amount  of  the  bid  for  that  site  which 
is  the  focus  of  the  combination. ' 

The  same  insight  is  displayed  in  developer  Bill  Windsor's  "unit 
function"  concept,  evolved  in  the  course  of  planning  Empire  Central  in 
Dallas,  Texas.  "This  approach  involves  an  analysis  of  all  factors 
contributing  to  the  success  of  an  occupant  in  a  particular  land  use.  These 
factors  are  then  combined  in  a  program  of  sufficient  size  to  justify  their 


Structure  and  Function 


65 


inclusion  in  a  single  geographical  unit."  The  unit  function  approach  to 
planning  is  clearly  exemplified  in  hotel  management,  where  the  unit 
function  is  overnight  sleeping  accommodations  and  complementary 
functions  are  added.  As  hotel  accountants  Ernest  Horwath  and  Louis 
Toth  write, 

Each  establishment  decides  what  services  should  be  provided.  .  .  .  few  hotels 
attempt  to  operate  a  drugstore  or  a  haberdasher,  but  they  do  provide  such 
conveniences  for  their  guests  by  renting  store  space,  with  lobby  as  well  as 
street  entrance,  to  druggists,  haberdashers  .  .  .  ' 

Ideally,  in  the  planning  of  a  generalized  community,  each  land  use  is 
considered  individually,  in  the  light  of  its  surroundings,  as  a  focal,  or  a 
unit,  function. 

The  statement  of  Horwath  and  Toth  brings  up  an  important  point:  it  is 
not  important  for  the  community  who  undertakes  a  particular  land  use, 
so  long  as  the  desired  function  is  performed  efficiently.  If  a  business  can 
be  conducted  more  efficiently  by  the  community  owner  in  certain 
circumstances— that  is  to  say,  so  the  services  can  be  offered  at  less  cost  or 
greater  convenience  to  the  public— he  may  undertake  it  directly  instead 
of  letting  it  out  to  private  persons.  The  hotel  affords  many  examples  of 
private  services  performed  directly  by  the  owning  authority,  such  as 
utilities,  waste  disposal,  room  service  and  meals,  and  so  forth.  In  the 
nineteenth  century,  the  main  dining  room  often  was  let  as  a  concession, 
as  many  complementary  functions  are  today.  As  hotelmen  gradually 
realized  the  close  correlation  between  dining  room  service  and  the 
reputation  of  a  hotel,  they  found  it  best  to  operate  the  dining  room 
directly  in  order  to  control  the  quality  of  food  service.  With  the  improved 
quality  controls  of  today's  franchised  restaurants,  the  cycle  is  coming 
round  again. 

It  should  be  apparent  that  the  decision  how  and  by  whom  the  land  can 
be  used  to  best  advantage  is  an  on-going  process  and  involves  no  less 
than  planning  the  whole  economic  structure  of  the  community.  In  the 
shopping  center,  the  desirability  of  planning  as  much  competition  in 
each  line  as  the  market  can  adequately  support  has  already  been  noted. 
The  planning  process  is  highlighted  by  management  consultant  James  C. 
Downs,  Jr.,  in  discussing  store  rentals: 

The  problem  of  the  manager  is  .  .  .  finding  a  tenant  who  can  establish  a 
business  in  the  vacant  store  which  will  have  the  highest  chance  of  meeting 
with  success.  The  problem  involves  substantial  creative  activity  on  the  part  of 
the  manager  who  must  first  analyze  the  location  in  terms  of  its  merchandizing 
potentials,  and  must  then  seek  a  tenant  who  can  be  interested  in  starting  a 
business  in  that  space  to  meet  that  indicated  demand. 


66 


The  Art  of  Community 


Under  unified  ownership,  as  noted  previously,  the  private  interests  of 
the  tenants  are  reconciled  in  the  interest  of  the  common  landlord.  This  is 
the  basis  of  the  third  function  of  land,  designated  as  leadership.  By 
virtue  of  the  unified  ownership,  the  management  can  act  as  a  catalyst  to 
promote  successful  social  action  in  joint  enterprises  of  all  kinds:  in 
economics,  civics,  arts,  and  recreation.  Often  this  is  accomplished  by  the 
sponsorship  and  guidance  of  tenants'  associations,  which  can  serve  many 
specific  community  functions  and,  in  the  process,  foster  communication 
and  high  morale  within  the  community.  Leadership  also  includes 
arbitration  of  differences  among  the  tenants,  as  well  as  guidance  and 
participation  in  joint  efforts.  More  than  in  any  other  area,  the  art  in  the 
art  of  community  consists  in  this  aspect  of  the  manager's  role.  Here  is  his 
least  tangible  or  measurable,  but  potentially  his  most  rewarding,  role. 

While  tenant  selection,  land  planning  and  leadership  together 
constitute  the  real  estate  function  and  are  therefore  the  direct  responsi- 
bility of  the  landlord  alone,  this  is  not  to  say  his  role  goes  no  further. 
For  there  is  no  function  for  which  the  owner  is  wholly  devoid  of 
responsibility,  since  he  sponsors  every  activity  represented  in  the 
community  by  the  act  of  providing  space  for  it.  Every  other  function 
than  the  original  three,  however,  can  be  performed  by  others,  including 
even  physical  security  and  the  building  and  mainterjance  of  streets  and 
common  areas.  Whether  the  community  owner  undertakes  these 
additional  tasks  directly  depends  on  what  may  be  the  most  practical 
under  the  particular  circumstances. 

Improvement  and  maintenance  of  common  areas— unlike  planning  the 
layout  of  streets  and  the  other  common  areas  which  is  a  part  of  the  real 
estate  function— can  be  performed  by  the  tenants  on  a  pro-rata  basis. 
Police  patrol  and  fire  monitoring  can  be  supplied  in  the  same  manner  as 
common-area  maintenance.  Such  services  in  shopping  centers  are 
frequently  contracted  out  and  paid  for  by  the  merchants'  association,  an 
arrangement  which  works  well  where  the  community  owner  ensures 
through  leadership  and  tactful  assistance  that  the  tenants'  association 
can  operate  smoothly  and  with  continuity.  The  weakness  of  the  tenants' 
association  is  the  weakness  of  all  volunteer  associations:  it  is  the  difficulty 
of  sustaining  interested  membership  and  stable  objectives  in  the  absence 
of  a  guiding  sponsor. 

While  patrol  and  fire  monitoring  systems  may  be  included  with 
common-area  maintenance,  in  a  fundamental  sense  the  security  of  the 
community  is  a  part  of  the  owner's  real  estate  function.  Under  land 
planning,  he  supervises  the  design  of  all  construction  from  the  stand- 
point of  safety.  He  also  chooses  tenants  with  a  view  to  their  compatibility 


Structure  and  Function 


67 


and  complementarity  with  other  members  of  the  community  and  learns 
to  anticipate  in  the  leases  and  to  provide  in  other  ways  against  disputes 
developing  among  the  tenants.  By  his  informal  peacemaking  and 
arbitrating,  he  resolves  differences  that  might  otherwise  become  serious. 
In  these  many  ways  he  ensures  "quiet  possession,"  as  it  was  so  admirably 
phrased  in  the  language  of  the  Common  Law,  for  his  tenants.  The  well- 
being  of  the  community  is  very  largely  a  reflection  of  how  well  the  real 
estate  function  is  performed. 

By  his  choice  of  tenants,  deciding  what  land  uses  are  most  complemen- 
tary and  how  to  dispose  them  in  the  community,  the  owner  is  responsible 
for  the  basic  economic  structure  of  the  community.  By  his  leadership 
qualities,  he  then  does  what  he  can  to  help  promote  its  functioning.  His  is 
a  sensitive  role  which  requires  utmost  tact  and  rapport  with  the  tenants.  It 
succeeds  in  the  shopping  center  because  the  tenants  recognize  him  to  be  a 
businessman  like  themselves,  whose  interest,  however,  is  the  success  of 
each  and  every  tenant  and,  thereby,  of  the  community  as  a  whole. 


CHAPTER  6 


Comparisons  With 
Primitive  Community 

From  beyond  the  bounds  of  contemporary  civilization,  through 
archeology  and  anthropology,  we  can  gain  a  brpader  perspective  and 
appreciation  of  the  proprietary  community.  For  the  proprietary  com- 
munity is  not  unique  to  our  time  and  culture.  Its  roots  are  deep  in 
human  history.  Man  may  first  have  emerged  into  permanent  villages  in 
the  proprietary  pattern,  but  the  pattern  already,  even  then,  had  long 
been  established  in  the  experience  of  hunting  and  gathering  people. 
Hence  there  is  an  essential  congruence  between  the  organization 
described  for  modern  proprietary  communities  and  a  basic  organiza- 
tional pattern  that  is  widely  general  among  village  communities  of  pre- 
literate  people  throughout  the  world. 

The  basic  similarity  between  the  village  community  in  many  of  its 
widely  diverse  forms  reported  by  anthropologists  and  modern  proprie- 
tary communities— also  highly  diverse  in  form— is  the  degree  to  which  its 
organization  is  proprietary,  based  on  land.  Without  engaging  in  a 
technical  discussion  of  the  meanings  of  the  word,  "ownership,"  laden  as 
it  is  with  judicial  interpretation  from  our  own  Anglo-American  law 
tradition,  what  we  are  looking  for  in  functional  terms  as  we  approach 
the  village  community  is  the  distributive  authority  over  the  village 
lands.  Who  has  the  social  authority  to  commit  the  use  of  land? 

Within  households,  in  the  primitive  world,  land  is  commonly  adminis- 
tered by  an  elder  male  ini  the  line  of  property  succession.  For  groups  of 
households,  it  may  be  administered  by  a  clan  or  lineage  or  other  group 
head  who  is  commonly  an  elder  male  of  the  kin  group  of  widest  span. 
And  similarly  at  the  village  level.  This  is  "the  familiar  pattern,"  in 
anthropologist  Melville  Herskovits'  words,  "of  village  land  ownership 
held  in  trust  and  administered  by  the  village  head  in  behalf  of  its 
members,  native  or  adopted,  and  family  ownership,  for  which  the  head 
of  the  family  is  trustee."  '  The  system  is  sometimes  called  seignorialism 
since  the  distributive  authority  is  exercised  by  a  senior  member  of  the  kin 
group  at  the  span  or  level  of  organization  in  question.  Substitute  the 
subgroupings  of  a  shopping  center— its  shops  and  stores— for  familial 
groupings,  and  the  same  essential  structure  of  land  tenure  obtains  for  the 
modern  proprietary  community  as  does  for  the  village.  However  much  a 


70 


The  Art  of  Community 


given  decision  about  land  use  may  reflect  a  consensus  of  the  community 
membership,  the  uhimate  responsibiUty  is  not  diff"use  but  is  identified 
with  one  or  a  very  Umited  number  of  individuals.* 

Moreover,  the  same  three  functional  requirements  of  a  community 
that  are  fulfilled  by  the  landlord  in  a  modern  proprietary  community  are 
fulfilled  in  a  like  manner  by  the  head  of  the  village  community.  In  both 
cases,  they  are  fulfilled  by  the  proprietary  authority  as  a  land-owning 
function.  These  three  functional  requirements,  it  will  be  recalled,  are 
selection  of  community  members,  land  planning,  and  leadership. 

Selection  of  members,  the  first  of  these  functional  requirements,  is 
highly  specialized  in  certain  forms  of  modern  proprietary  community 
such  as  the  shopping  center,  where  prospective  tenants  are  carefully 
screened  for  compatibility  with  existing  members,  for  potential  contribu- 
tion to  the  specific  market  area  being  served  by  the  center  (an  ecological 
consideration),  for  credit  standing,  and  for  merchandising  skills.  There  is 
less  scope  for  selection  in  the  village  community.  Here  there  is  little 
control  over  the  precise  makeup  of  the  community,  for  the  population  is 
largely  given.  But  the  selection  process  is  not  less  important  when  it  does 
occur.  The  village  head  occasionally  allocates  the  use  of  land  to  new 
arrivals— not  infrequently  in  these  days  visiting  anthropologists— who 
are  congenial  to  the  group  and  want  to  take  up  residence,  and  by 
dispossession  he  exiles  individuals  who  have  made  themselves  intoler- 
able (exactly  as  a  shopping  center  manager  fails  to  renew  the  lease  of 
an  incompatible  tenant).  However  infrequent  in  the  village,  as  com- 
pared with  modern  proprietary  communities,  membership  control  is 
still  a  functional  requisite  of  community  life  for  which  there  must  be 
regular  provision.  In  the  village  as  in  the  modern  proprietary  commu- 
nity, however  much  consultation,  via  council  or  otherwise,  may  precede 
a  given  decision,  this  requirement  is  fulfilled  as  a  normal  function  of 
the  land  distributive  authority. f 

*For  simplicity,  the  discussion  will  assume  that  land  ownership  in  a  village  community  is 
always  unity.  This  is  not  always  the  case,  as  many  exhibit  two  or  more  divisions  of  land 
authority  along  kinship  lines.  Subdivision  is  limited  as  compared  with  contemporary 
municipal  communities,  however,  since  cleavage  occurs  along  lines  of  corporate  kinship 
groups  rather  than  random  fracturing  on  an  individual  basis.  Divisions  may  also  appear 
when  kin  groups  of  different  origin  occupy  the  same  village. 

tAnthropologist  Raymond  Firth  records  an  expression  of  exile  from  the  Pacific  island 
society  of  Tikopia  that  evokes  in  its  simplicity  the  pathos  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  poem,  "The 
Wanderer."  Inasmuch  as  all  land  was  owned  by  the  chiefs,  an  exiled  person  had  no  recourse 
but  to  canoe  out  to  sea-to  suicide  or  to  life  as  a  stranger  on  other  islands.  The  expression  for 
a  person  who  is  exiled  translates  that  such  a  person  "has  no  place  on  which  to  stand." 


Comparisons  With  Primitive  Community 


71 


Land-use  planning,  the  second  functional  requisite,  is  likewise  compar- 
atively complex  in  a  modern  proprietary  community  such  as  a  shopping 
center.  Planning  the  kinds  of  enterprises,  the  size  and  number  of  each, 
and  their  disposition  on  the  site  for  the  best  long-term  interest  of  the 
center,  all  of  which  may  be  considered  a  kind  of  positive  zoning,  is  the 
continuing  responsibility  of  the  lessor  of  the  land.  Such  planning  is  more 
critical  in  contemporary  society  because  of  the  greater  number  of 
specializations  of  land  use— each  with  its  special  requirements—  and  also 
because  of  the  rapidity  of  change.  Where  land  use  is  constant  and 
relatively  homogeneous  throughout  a  community,  as  for  direct  subsist- 
ence, this  planning  function  is  less  in  demand— although  even  simple 
fields  differ  in  their  relative  fertility,  nearness  to  ponds  or  water  supply, 
distance  to  walk,  and  so  forth.  Where  space  planning  seems  least  to  be 
required,  it  lies  latent,  nonetheless,  as  a  function  of  land  ownership.^ 

The  third  requisite,  leadership,  is  the  task  most  fully  documented  for 
the  village  head  by  ethnographers.  "Coordination"  is  a  term  which 
sometimes  describes  this  function.  In  the  village  as  in  the  shopping 
center,  it  is  a  role  which  is  most  effective  when  it  attracts  little  attention.  It 
is  in  this  capacity  that  a  village  head  acts  in  council  as  a  chairman,  whose 
purpose  is  to  discover  the  "mind  of  the  meeting."  In  the  daily  life  of  the 
village  outside  of  council,  he  acts  in  general  in  ways  that  promote  peace. 
In  like  manner,  the  shopping  center  manager  promotes  peace  within  the 
center  and  guides  the  work  of  the  tenants'  association.* 

The  following  typical  characterization  of  the  functional  role  of  a 
village  head  may  help  the  reader  who  is  unacquainted  with  ethnographic 
writing  to  form  a  general  impression  of  this  type  of  administrative  role 
worldwide,  or  at  least  to  counteract  the  popular  misconception  of  the 
"tribal  chief"  as  a  "strong  man"  ruling  over  his  subjects  by  wielding  the 
heaviest  club.  The  setting  is  a  hunting  and  gathering  society  on  the 
northwest  coast  of  North  America: 

The  chief  of  the  lineage  was  the  custodian  both  of  the  intangible  rights  and  of 
the  lands  and  material  possessions  (of  the  lineage).  The  lineage  chief  was  in 
this  respect  similar  to  the  executor,  in  our  own  culture,  of  a  large  estate  who 
manages  its  various  enterprises  for  the  heirs.  It  was  the  chief  who  decided 
when  the  group  should  move  from  the  winter  village  to  their  fishing  station 
and  commence  work  on  the  weirs  and  traps.  It  was  he  who  decided  that  a 
mask  representing  a  certain  hereditary  crest  should  be  worn  by  a  dancer  in  a 

*Generalizing  about  peasant  villages  in  Southeast  Asia  from  his  experience  in  Hsin  Hsing, 
Bernard  GaUin  observes  that  the  loss  of  "capable  and  interested  village  landlords  who  can 
lead  them  in  times  of  trouble  .  .  .  may  well  be  a  general  problem  in  those  villages  where  the 
land  reform  has  at  least  indirectly  caused  the  downfall  in  wealth  and  prestige  of  the  former 
landlords." 


72 


The  Art  of  Community 


ceremonial,  and  that  certain  lineage-owned  songs  should  be  sung.  ...  All 
these  varieties  of  possessions,  material  and  intangible  alike,  constituted  the 
wealth  of  the  social  group.  The  better  the  use  their  chief  made  of  these  riches, 
the  more  was  the  well-being  and  prestige  of  the  group  enhanced. 

In  addition  to  the  similar  performance  of  the  three  basic  functions  of 
land,  further  reflection  reveals  that  in  the  modern  proprietary  commu- 
nity as  exemplified  in  the  shopping  center,  and  in  the  village  community, 
the  incentives  are  much  alike  which  motivate  the  land  manager  to 
perform  in  the  role  for  which  he  is  uniquely  fitted  by  his  place  in  the 
social  structure.  Rent  is  the  central  conception  which  makes  this  compari- 
son possible. 

In  the  shopping  center,  management  is  productive  of  rents,  for  it 
creates  an  environment  favoring  the  prosperity  of  each  and  every 
occupant's  business.  The  owner's  role  is  to  provide  such  favorable 
environment,  both  physical  and  social,  that  present  and  prospective 
occupants  will  bid  for  space,  thereby  increasing  the  rents  the  property 
can  command  in  the  market.  Rent  returns  to  the  owner  a  threefold 
reward  for  thus  socially  administering  his  property  to  the  use  of  others: 
First,  it  supports  him  and  his  family  in  the  material  needs  of  life. 
Secondly,  since  rents  measure  the  value  of  the  owner's  services  to  the 
members  of  the  community,  they  are  tangible  evidence,  for  himself  and 
the  world  to  see,  of  successful  performance  in  his  "social  role.  Thirdly, 
rents  enable  him  to  perform  his  role,  since  they  are  the  community 
revenue  and  as  such  finance  its  operation;  moreover,  they  can  be  the 
means  of  raising  the  present  level  of  community  functioning,  enabling 
the  owner  to  make  it  successful  in  even  more  ways  that  his  good 
management  can  devise.  Rents  thus  reward  the  owner  with  subsistence, 
respect,  and  opportunity. 

An  important  aspect  of  the  similarity  between  modern  and  primitive 
forms  of  proprietary  community  is  the  functional  correspondence 
between  rents  in  the  one,  and  gifts  and  help  traditionally  received  by  the 
village  head  in  the  other.  Both  "finance"  the  public  functions.  In  the 
village— presumably  because  of  its  cooperative  structure— there  is  a 
tendency  for  a  disproportionate  part  of  the  public  functions  to  be 
ceremonial,  and  gifts  in  kind  make  possible  the  giving  of  feasts  and  the 
accommodation  of  large  public  gatherings.  Specific  examples  are  legion 
and  take  many  specialized  forms,  from  the  potlatching  tradition  of  the 
Northwest  Coast*  or  the  Polynesian  antja^ to  the  ritual  performances  of 
the  Hopi,  where  the  chief  distributes  valid  title  to  village  land  among  the 
heads  of  the  several  clans  in  exchange  for  their  help  in  the  village 
ceremonial,  each  clan  performing  the  public  duties  associated  with  a 


Comparisons  With  Primitive  Community 


73 


particular  part  of  the  village  ceremonial  calendar.  Thus  do  the  gifts  in 
kind  and  the  help  received  by  the  village  head  enable  him  to  fulfill  his 
functional  role. 

The  functional  equivalence  of  rents  in  modern  proprietary  communi- 
ties and  gifts  or  help  given  and  received  in  village  communities,  enables 
us  to  readily  analyze  the  personal  rewards  accruing  to  the  village  head  by 
virtue  of  his  managerial  role  and  to  see  that  they  are  in  substance  the 
same  three  that  accrue  to  the  shopping  center  manager. 

At  the  simplest  level  of  community,  the  individual  household,  the 
household  head  of  necessity  provides  his  food,  clothing,  and  shelter  from 
his  personal  resources  and  those  of  his  immediate  family,  which  may  or 
may  not  be  the  extent  of  the  village  settlement.  Seldom  if  ever  is 
headship  on  the  household  level  a  full-time  specialization.  As  the  level  of 
general  productivity  and  population  rises  with  the  addition  of  house- 
holds and  groups  of  households,  however,  these  resources  will  be 
augmented  by  gifts  and  services  until,  with  more  complex  community 
development— especially  in  manorialism— headship  may  emerge  at  the 
village  level  as  a  full-time  occupation. 

Self-respect  and  approbation  by  others,  the  second  of  the  three  basic 
management  incentives,  result  in  each  case  from  the  shopping  center 
manager  or  the  village  head  living  up  to  the  image  of  the  successful 
manager.  In  contemporary  society,  the  established  image  of  the  success- 
ful income-property  manager  is  one  who  can  generate  a  good  balance 
sheet  and  operating  statement  for  the  enterprise.  In  the  village,  on  the 
other  hand,  the  typical  image  of  the  "good  chief"  is  one  who  gives  public 
feasts  and  always  behaves  generously.  Fulfillment  of  each  of  these 
objectives  depends  on  the  manager's  ability  to  command  a  return  from 
the  enterprise— in  the  one  case,  rent,  in  the  other,  gifts  and  help.  Such 
return  depends  on  the  ability  and  willingness  of  the  members  to  pay  rent 
or  make  customary  contributions,  and  this  depends  in  turn  on  the 
productivity  of  the  enterprise  and,  ultimately,  its  day-to-day 
management. 

The  difference  in  what  each  does  with  the  income  from  the  enterprise- 
declaring  dividends  to  stockholders  outside  the  community  or  returning 
it  to  the  community  members  in  the  form  of  feasts  and  generosity— is 
accounted  for  by  the  fact  that  the  village  is  structured  as  a  cooperative 
instead  of  as  an  income  property;  for  the  village  members  are  also  the 
beneficial  title  holders  of  the  village  land  and  other  properties  of  the  kin 
group.  The  income  property  and  the  cooperative,  represented  here  by  the 
shopping  center  and  the  village  respectively,  are  basically  alike  in 


74 


The  Art  of  Community 


structure  except  in  one  respect:  they  are  at  the  opposite  poles  of  a 
continuum  of  differing  degrees  of  overlap  of  the  ownership  and  occu- 
pancy of  the  community  by  the  same  persons.  Since  the  village  enterprise 
is  a  total  social  cosmos,  the  beneficial  owners  of  the  land  are  the  villagers 
themselves;  hence  it  is  they  who  receive  the  dividends  of  profit  accruing 
to  the  enterprise,  which  come  back  to  them  as  generosity  and  public 
feasts. 

A  psychological  reward  accrues  directly  to  the  headman,  or  chief, 
moreover,  from  any  public  display  of  the  well-being  of  his  community, 
whether  this  be  by  means  of  wealth  channeled  directly  through  him  or 
not.  Any  such  display  reflects  credit  on  the  immediate  social  group  as  a 
working  organization  since  accumulation  of  wealth  requires  their  joint 
efforts.  It  is  evidence  to  the  members  of  the  group  and  to  the  world  at 
large  that  they  are  organized,  that  they  can  "get  together"  and  accom- 
plish things.  This  display  has  a  special  psychological  value  in  the  village 
context,  inasmuch  as  the  cooperative  form  of  organization,  as  noted 
elsewhere,  requires  more  of  an  investment  in  activities  designed  to 
promote  group  solidarity  than  do  other  forms  of  organization. 

Finally,  the  gifts  and  help  he  receives  enable  the  village  head  to 
responsibly  perform  the  functions  of  his  office,  thereby  promoting  the 
interests  of  the  enterprise  and  securing  himself  in  his  social  role  in  the 
same  manner  as  the  income-property  manager. 

The  congruity  here  sketched  between  the  village  and  modern  forms 
of  proprietary  community  affirms  the  unity  of  principle  underlying 
human  association  in  its  endless  variety  of  particular  forms  and 
manifestations  and  the  flux  of  culture  and  circumstance. 


CHAPTER  7 


The  Nature  of 
Community  Organization 

Ye  know  that  the  princes  of  the  Gentiles  exercise  authority  over  them,  and 
they  that  exercise  authority  are  called  "benefactors."  But  it  shall  not  be  so 
with  you.  But  who  among  you  would  be  great,  let  him  be  your  servant;  and 
who  among  you  would  be  first,  let  him  be  a  servant  to  all. 

Mathew  20:25 
Mark  10:42 
Luke  22:25 

The  general  literature  of  social  science  suggests  two  alternative  bases 
of  association  in  community  life,  sovereignty  and  kinship,  with  possibly 
a  third  consisting  of  strong  attachments  of  feeling  or  common  dedication 
to  an  ideal,  as  in  a  religious  commune.  Consider,  instead,  these 
propositions: 

1.  That  property  in  land  alone  can  provide  the  structural  basis  for  a 
community.  Relationships  based  on  property  of  other  kinds,  whether 
governed  by  kinship  or  by  contract,  as  well  as  attachments  based  on 
feeling  ,  abundantly  serve  the  members  of  a  society  in  other  ways  but  are 
poorly  equipped  to  resolve  by  themselves  the  spatial  problems  of 
community  life. 

2.  That  sovereignty  can  better  be  understood,  not  as  an  alternative  principle 
of  association,  but  as  a  condition  that  manifests  itself  where  there  is  a  default 
or  insufficiency  of  proprietary  community  administration.  Communities 
with  weak  or  fractionated  property  in  land  are  least  capable  of  adapting 
to  change  and  lack  appropriate  means  of  responding  to  crises.  Force  here 
gains  a  foothold  as  a  response  to  a  crisis  which  a  community  is 
unprepared  to  meet.  If  the  crisis  continues  for  long,  then  the  community 
manifests  the  pathological  condition  of  sovereignty,  a  condition  in  which 
the  force  response  has  become  institutionalized,  or  habitual. 

3.  That  kinship  and  contract  are  functional  analogues  at  successive 
evolutionary  levels  of  society  and  are  the  fundamental  tools,  each  at  its 
respective  level,  for  the  productive  administration  of property. 


76 


The  Art  of  Community 


The  Proprietary  Principle 

The  fundamental  organizing  principle  in  human  affairs  is  property.  It 
is  a  convention  whereby  people  can  get  together  respecting  the  use  of 
things.  In  order  to  get  together,  they  must  first  have  reference  to  some 
standard  or  shared  principle  or  expectation  outside  their  own  immediate 
and  personal  desires  in  the  matter.  There  must  be  some  objective 
criterion.  The  convention  of  property  is  such  an  impersonal  referent,  a 
basis  on  which  to  arrive  at  a  consensus.* 

Ownership  is  social  authority.  It  is  the  recognition  by  others  of  one's 
own  claim  to  property,  and  it  is  the  fulfillment  of  that  claim.  It  is  thus  a 
50c/a/ phenomenon  in  the  most  exact  sense.  Ownership  in  any  functional 
sense  is  not  established  by  individual  claims  alone;  it  equally  entails 
recognition  of  those  claims. 

A  person  who  owns  a  given  item  of  property  has  a  certain  standing,  or 
position,  in  society  with  respect  to  that  item  of  property.  He  alone  has 
jurisdiction  over  its  use— balanced  by  obligation  to  recognize  the  corre- 
sponding claims  of  others.  This  pinpointing  of  responsibility  or  authority 
with  respect  to  a  thing  permits  it  to  come  into  peaceable  use  by  others,  by 
their  making  an  agreement  with  the  person  who  owns  it.  By  the  same 
token,  other  property  in  the  society  is  available  to  that  person  if  he  can 
succeed  in  making  an  agreement  on  mutually  acceptable  terms  with 
other  owners.  In  this  way  it  is  necessary  to  make  an  agreement  with  only 
one  person  in  the  society  as  to  the  use  of  a  thing,  rather  than  with  all  in 
the  society  who  might  have  some  desire  for  the  item.  Such  positions  can 
be  bought,  sold,  given,  or  exchanged,  in  whole  or  in  part,  for  a  limited  or 
an  unlimited  time,  as  agreed  by  the  parties  concerned. 

The  structure  of  authority,  or  of  positions,  in  a  society  with  respect  to 
resources  is  highly  flexible  and  adaptable  to  changing  needs.  Different 
items  of  property  are  of  different  value  to  different  individuals,  depend- 
ing on  their  particular  circumstances,  skills,  desires,  and  purposes.  Hence, 
agreements  come  to  be  made,  and  property  changes  hands,  tending  to 
find  its  highest  use.  The  differential  between  personal  value  and  market 
or  customary  price  stimulates  mobility  in  the  property,  or  resources,  of 
society.  Where  more  than  one  person  desires  a  given  resource,  the  rules 

'Property,  following  the  usage  of  Spencer  Heath,  is  anything  that  can  be  the  subject 
matter  of  contract.  Those  things  that  have  no  present  or  imagined  utility,  or  that  have  no 
scarcity,  such  as  light  and  air  under  most  conditions,  are  excluded  from  property.  The  term 
property  is  often  generalized  to  mean  the  whole  institution  of  property  and  exchange  in  this 
discussion.  For  a  creative  approach  to  understanding  the  institution  of  property,  see: 
Harold  Demsetz,  "Toward  a  Theory  of  Property  Rights,"  American  Economic  Review,  May, 
1967,  pp.  347-359. 


The  Nature  of  Community  Organization 


11 


of  property  allow  it  to  be  used  by  one  without  conflict  or  impasse  among 
those  equally  desiring  its  use.  Thus  the  institution  of  property  is  a  means 
for  bringing  wealth  into  productive  use  in  a  society. 

Ownership  is  not  an  alternative  to  holding  and  using  wealth  by  force, 
as  some  have  suggested,  for  to  call  it  an  alternative  is  to  suggest  that  force 
itself  can  be  a  successful  arbiter  of  the  use  of  resources.  Force  hardly  can 
serve  such  a  social  function,  for  the  more  diligently  a  person  acquires 
and  defends  wealth  by  force  and  seeks  to  gain  some  security  of  posses- 
!  sion  by  that  means,  the  less  he  can  use  it  productively.  He  must  rest  one 
I  hand  always  on  the  sword,  leaving  but  one  for  the  tiller  or  the  plow. 
I  Under  such  a  "system,"  moreover,  the  security  of  one  militates  against 
j  the  security  of  every  other.  By  the  convention  of  property,  however, 
I  security  of  possession  is  achieved  for  all,  not  by  physical  might,  but  by 
j  consensus  with  respect  to  a  set  of  successful  social  rules  evolved  from 
j  experience. 

^  How  self-consistent  is  a  proprietary  system?  Does  a  developed  system 
of  property  presuppose  an  external  agency  to  enforce  performance  of 
contracts?  Despite  much  popular  supposition,  the  overwhelming  evi- 

j  dence  is  that  default  and  fraud  are  self-curing.  To  the  extent  that  a 
person  acquires  a  reputation  as  a  poor  credit  risk,  he  finds  himself 
outside  the  exchange  system.  A  refusal  to  make  compensation  or  other 
settlement  after  receiving  an  adverse  judgment  in  an  arbitration  auto- 
matically brings  a  loss  of  credit  standing.  As  a  system  of  property  and 
exchange  develops  and  becomes  sophisticated  in  any  degree,  systems  of 
rapid  determination  and  exchange  of  credit  information  make  it 
increasingly  difficult  for  any  to  defraud  others  for  very  long.  The 
increasing  impersonality  of  business  relations,  as  more  and  more  of  the 
population  are  brought  into  a  world-wide  system  of  mutual  services, 
makes  it  essential  that  this  should  be  so.  On  all  levels  of  society,  both 
primitive  and  modern,  exile  is  the  natural  and  automatic  remedy  for 
default  and  fraud.  It  is  axiomatic  among  experienced  businessmen  that 
contract  is  as  good  as  the  intentions  of  the  parties  to  it— that  the  only 
strong  contract  is  one  which  advantages  all  parties  concerned.  Thus  are 
property  and  service  by  contract  the  antithesis  of  conflict  and  force.* 

*The  illogic  of  the  idea  that,  because  some  businessmen  cheat  and  defraud  the  public, 
therefore  business  is  fraud,  is  illumined  by  analogy  with  card  playing,  an  older  and  more 
familiar  pastime.  Cheating  at  business  is  no  more  doing  business  than  cheating  at  cards  is 
playing  the  game  of  cards.  The  point  suggests  the  story  of  the  minister  who  was  caught 
stealing  chickens,  whereupon  his  outraged  neighbors  pressed  for  a  law  against  people 
becoming  ministers.  The  story  is  incongruous  because  the  role  of  minister  is  so  well  defined 
in  our  society.  The  role  of  the  modern  businessman  is  not  yet  as  clearly  defined,  even  by 
many  businessmen  themselves. 

I 


I 


78 


The  Art  of  Community 


Moreover,  since  personal  capabilities  requiring  the  use  of  skills  and 
judgment  are  frequently  the  subject  of  contract  and,  therefore,  property, 
respect  for  persons  and  personality  is  a  logical  development  of  the 
institution  of  property. 

The  convention  of  property  applied  to  land  brings  land  into  use  in  the 
same  way  as  other  kinds  of  property— that  is,  without  impasse  or  conflict. 

The  uses  to  which  any  item  of  property,  including  land,  can  be  put  in  a 
given  situation  depend  greatly  on  the  complementary  uses  being  made  of 
other  kinds  of  property  near  and  far.  The  possible  uses  of  a  bar  of  gold 
or  of  a  barrel  of  oil  depend  on  many  conditions  of  the  market,  the 
accessibility  of  oil  refining  facilities,  and  so  forth.  With  readily  transpor- 
table property,  it  is  of  little  consequence  if  surrounding  properties  are 
diversely  owned  and  used  in  non-conforming  ways,  for  people  with 
mutually  compatible  kinds  of  properties  will  bring  them  together.  But 
with  property  in  land,  the  situation  is  diff"erent.  Being  intangible,  space  is 
not  transportable.  Unlike  other  kinds  of  property,  therefore,  property  in 
land  cannot  be  moved  to  an  environment  more  favorable  for  its  use.  Its 
value  as  an  economic  good  is  a  function  of  its  surroundings.  Its  higher 
use  therefore  depends  upon  rearranging  the  environment  to  conform  to 
it. 

Since  the  possible  uses  of  a  site  depend  on  surrounding  land  uses 
(ultimately,  all  human  action  is  land  use  of  one  kind  or  another),  it  is 
essential  for  its  most  productive  use  that  the  uses  of  accessible  surround- 
ing land  be  coordinated.  Seldom  can  this  be  done  eff'ectively  under  a 
multiplicty  of  separate  authorities.  If  surrounding  sites  are  owned  in 
severalty,  the  several  owners  may  or  may  not  be  able  to  accommodate 
their  various  uses  to  a  comprehensive  plan,  depending  on  many,  often 
fortuitous,  factors  affecting  the  ability  and  wishes  of  each.  They  are 
neighbors  of  circumstance,  not  of  convenience.  "Even  where  agreement 
can  be  reached  on  a  plan  for  the  community,  the  plan  is  not  self- 
activating."^ 

This  situation  extends  to  every  kind  of  property  sufficiently  complex  to 
require  unit  administration.  A  comedy  situation  concerns  three  impre- 
sarios who  owned,  each  one,  a  third  of  a  lady  performer's  contract.  When 
each  tried  independently  to  manage  a  different  part  of  her— one  of  them 
her  legs,  another  her  hands,  and  the  third  her  voice,— they  encountered 
no  little  confusion  in  arranging  her  act,  not  to  mention  her  itinerary.  In 
the  end,  their  only  reward  was  a  kick,  a  slap,  and  a  sharp  remark. 
Confusion  would  likewise  result  if  the  ownership  of  a  company  such  as 
General  Motors  were  divided  up  in  such  a  way  that  one  person  owned  all 


The  Nature  of  Community  Organization 


79 


the  bolts  used  in  production,  another  the  stamping  machines,  another  the 
sheet  metal,  and  so  forth. 

In  the  case  of  a  community,  the  basic  capital  is  land,  and  the  product  is 
favorable  environment  for  individuals  occupying  portions  of  it.  Effective 
operation  here  depends  on  undivided  or  unit  administration  of  the 
capital,  no  less  than  in  the  examples  just  given.  The  successful  pattern 
historically  has  been  always  to  merge  the  separate  titles  in  a  capital 
property,  whether  by  pooling,  assembling  by  purchase,  or  both,  thereby 
enabling  the  organized  owners  of  the  unified  property  to  securely  and 
systematically  make  it  most  productive  for  themselves  by  making  it  most 
serviceable  to  other  people. 

As  was  shown  in  Chapter  5,  when  land  is  owned  in  corporate  or  other 
unitary  title,  it  is  capable  of  structuring  a  community— of  affording  a 
basis  for  organization  and  concert  of  purpose  among  a  population 
engaged  in  many  independent  activities  involving  the  productive  and 
consumer  uses  of  property  of  all  kinds. 

To  the  extent  that  the  land— the  basic  capital— of  a  community  is 
subject  to  divided  administration  the  community  tends,  as  the  result  of 
unsuccessful  efforts  to  mutually  accommodate  its  differing  land  uses,  to 
develop  a  condition  of  sovereignty.  The  community  need  not  develop 
such  a  condition,  given  a  stable  environment.  But  environment  is  seldom 
so  lenient.  Subdivided  communities,  being  less  flexible  or  responsive  to 
change,  are  least  stable  and  most  prone  to  develop  sovereignty.  Among 
the  kinds  of  environmental  change  that  test  the  soundness  of  community 
organization  are  increase  in  numbers  and  transiency  of  population, 
technological  change,  specializations  of  land  use  such  as  accompany  the 
development  of  a  market  system,  and  conditions  requiring  sustained 
military  defense. 


Volunteer  Association 

Some  communities  that  are  not  fully  organized  proprietary  communi- 
ties depend  heavily  on  feelings  of  solidarity  within  the  group  and  on 
leadership  volunteered  from  one  or  more  of  their  members.  Such 
communities  rely  on  what  might  be  termed  volunteer  association.  Such  a 
community  in  its  purest  form  would  lie  toward  the  opposite  end  of  a 
continuum  from  the  fully  organized  proprietary  community.  In  between 
would  lie  those  communities  having  some  development  of  property  in 
land  but  in  which  the  authority  or  responsibility  for  the  land  is  not  united 
or  clearly  defined. 


80 


The  Art  of  Community 


Volunteer  association  probably  occurs  as  an  element  in  any  group 
venture.  It  is  "spontaneous"  in  the  sense  that  it  depends  on  bonds  which 
are  non-explicit.  It  is  pro  tempore  rather  than  permanent  or  enduring. 
Coordinate  action  must  be  achieved  by  virtue  of  shared  enthusiasm  and 
common  dedication  to  a  purpose  which  transcends  immediate  self- 
interest.  It  is  characterized  by  its  participants'  volunteering  their  services 
to  a  felt  common  purpose  and  occasionally  enduring  private  sacrifice 
without  necessarily  any  expectation  of  return  other  than  personal 
satisfaction  for  having  contributed.  In  no  case  is  there  reason  to  expect 
return  in  proportion  to  contribution,  nor  is  voice  in  determining  policy  so 
measured.  Policy  is  determined  on  some  other  basis,  such  as  per  capita 
vote,  lottery,  charismatic  leadership,  or  a  combination  of  factors. 

Association  that  springs  up  in  time  of  crisis  is  characteristically 
volunteer.  Cultural  and  civic  organizations  commonly  depend  on  volun- 
teer participation.  The  weakness  of  such  groups  is  that,  while  crises  or 
special  events  may  bring  out  leadership  from  within  the  ranks,  they  have 
difficulty  sustaining  organization  and  membership  interest  during  the 
interim  periods  of  normalcy.  It  is  for  this  reason  that  "cooperative" 
ventures  in  retailing,  housing  and  other  fields  must  devote  a  dispropor- 
tionate amount  of  time  and  eff'ort  to  developing  and  sustaining  member- 
ship interest. 

Because  of  this  weakness,  volunteer  organization  does  not  afford  a 
permanent  basis  on  which  to  structure  a  community.  Attempts  to  make  it 
succeed,  commonly  described  as  experiments  in  voluntary  collectivism, 
have  regularly  failed.  Religious  communes  come  closest  to  succeeding, 
especially  if  sponsored  by  a  parent  religious  order  which  provides  some 
management  function  such  as  screening  prospective  members  for 
adherence  to  the  ideals  of  the  commune.  Such  a  group  proves  most 
enduring  if,  instead  of  attempting  to  be  biologically  self-perpetuating,  it 
adopts  a  rule  of  celibacy  and  segregation  of  the  sexes,  to  prevent 
recruitment  by  marriage  or  birth  or  the  formation  of  bonds  on  bases 
other  than  ideology. 

Volunteer  action  is  a  satisfactory  basis  for  the  administration  of 
community  sites  and  resources  only  where  there  is  emotional  commit- 
ment sufficient  to  overcome  the  ever  conflicting  site  interests.  For  without 
property  in  land,  every  disposition  of  land  use  would  have  to  optimize 
simultaneously  every  individual  member's  preferences— and  continue  to 
do  so— if  there  were  to  be  unanimous  agreement.  Because  of  the 
interdependencies  among  human  activities  and  the  variable  effects  of 
their  juxtaposition  in  space,  such  unanimity  is  seldom  even  momentarily 
possible.  Without  an  impersonal  basis  for  negotiating  the  use  of  sites, 
conflict  inevitably  develops  and,  with  it,  eventual  disintegration. 


The  Nature  of  Community  Organization  81 

The  normal  role  of  volunteer  participation  in  the  social  scheme  of 
things  is  auxiliary.  It  is  not  self-sustaining  but  requires  sponsorship  to 
stabilize  it,  to  steady  its  purpose,  to  assure  continuity.  Volunteer  partici- 
pation succeeds  best  when  its  constitutional  weakness  is  understood  and 
allowed  for.  Under  such  conditions  it  can  develop  magnificent  strengths. 
A  proprietary  community  authority  is  in  an  ideal  position  to  encourage, 
occasionally  guide,  and  secure  public  recognition  of  such  volunteer 
associations  as  it  may  be  in  the  interest  of  the  community,  for  artistic  and 
cultural  purposes,  to  foster. 


The  continuum  from  the  wholly  volunteer  community  (probably  a 
hypothetical  case  only)  to  the  fully  developed  proprietary  community 
consists  of  progressive  degrees  of  application  of  property  to  land  to  meet 
the  functional  requirements  of  an  enduring  community.  Such  a  contin- 
uum can  be  set  out  with  the  help  of  three  diagrams. 

The  wholly  volunteer  community,  having  no  private  property  in  land, 
administers  (to  the  extent  it  can  attain  unanimity)  the  entire  land  of  the 
community;  the  area  of  public  jurisdiction  is  coterminous  with  the 
community.  Since  the  interest  of  the  community  as  a  whole  is  not 
represented,  and  usufruct  vests  equally  in  every  member,  there  is  security 
of  use  for  none.  Public  and  private  authority  over  land  are  equally 
tenuous,  if  they  exist  at  all.  In  the  diagrams  that  follow,  horizontal  and 
vertical  lines  show  the  division  into  public  and  private  land  areas,  and 
slant  lines  indicate  the  extent  of  the  public  jurisdiction,  however  it  may 
be  effected.  Grey  indicates  a  lack  of  firm  authority  over  land,  whether 
private  or  public.  The  volunteer  community  is  represented  schematically 
thus: 


82 


The  Art  of  Community 


The  first  step  toward  the  fully  developed  proprietary  community  is  the 
introduction  of  private  property  in  land  as  a  means  of  arbitrating  the 
individual  and  private,  or  exclusive,  uses  of  land.  Its  advantages  will  be 
considered  shortly.  It  also  has  disadvantages.  Since  the  private  areas  are 
now  under  the  jurisdiction  of  private  persons,  they  are  removed  from  the 
public  jurisdiction.  The  public  authority  can  no  longer  make  any 
disposition  of  the  private  areas  without  infringing  property.  We  now 
have  security  of  use,  a  guarantee  of  quiet  possession  in  the  private  areas, 
but  the  sphere  of  public  jurisdiction  has  been  narrowed  accordingly,  as 
shown  in  this  diagram  for  the  middle  stages  on  the  continuum: 


The  middle  stages  differ  from  one  another  in  the  several  ways  in 
which  they  administer  the  public  jurisdiction,  which  is  now  restricted  to 
the  common  area  alone. 

The  first  way  is  for  the  common  area  to  continue  to  be  administered 
by  the  volunteer  participation  of  all  who  use  it.  The  only  increment  of 
the  property  principle  here  has  been  the  adoption  of  private  ownership 
of  the  separate  areas. 

A  second  way  is  for  the  common  area  to  be  owned  by  an  association  of 
the  individual  land  owners  and  administered  by  them  through  the 
association.  This  represents  a  further  advance  of  the  proprietary  princi- 
ple into  the  community,  for  it  limits  responsibility  for  administration  of 
the  common  area  to  the  owners  of  the  surrounding  properties,  or  to  those 
persons  who,  on  the  whole,  have  the  greatest  interest  in  its  eflficient 
administration.  But  within  the  association  of  land  owners,  the  organiza- 
tion is  still  on  a  volunteer  basis. 


The  Nature  of  Community  Organization 


83 


A  third  way  is  for  the  vote  and  the  apportionment  of  costs  of 
administration  of  the  common  area  to  be  determined  according  to 
amount  of  ownership  in  the  community,  instead  of  on  a  per  capita  basis. 

An  arrangement  whereby  a  common  area  is  administered  by  the 
surrounding  owners-in-severalty  is  called  a  condominium.  This  plan  of 
organization  has  seen  increasing  use  in  residential  subdivision  in  the 
United  States  since  World  War  II.  Condominium  is  not  to  be  confused 
with  the  cooperative  plans  that  became  popular,  especially  in  apartment 
houses,  in  the  1930's.  Cooperative  arrangements  are  similar  in  actual 
operation  (artificially  made  so  by  their  restrictive  rule  tying  shares  of 
ownership  to  unit  occupancy),  but  they  must  classify  as  variants  of  the 
fully  proprietary  community,  whose  essential  characteristic  of  unified 
ownership  they  share.* 

At  the  end  of  the  continuum  is  the  fully  organized  proprietary 
community.  Here  the  entire  land  of  the  community  is  owned  under  single 
title,  with  the  separate  parts  leased  out.  Once  more  the  public  jurisdiction 
is  extended  to  include  the  whole  community,  but  now  this  is  an  effective, 
proprietary  j  urisdiction. 


*Condominium  apartments  and  office  buildings  are  socially  retrogressive  for  a  number 
of  reasons,  one  of  them  being  that  they  produce  such  a  fragmentation  of  titles,  not  only  on 
the  ground  but  in  the  airspace  over  the  ground,  as  to  preclude  the  possibility  in  many  cases 
even  of  rebuilding  on  the  same  site,  much  less  reassembling  the  land  at  a  later  date  for 
redevelopment.  Thus  they  lead  to  increasing  dependence  on  the  political  process  of 
condemnation.  The  popularity  of  condominiums,  like  that  of  today's  cooperatives,  results 
from  monetary  uncertainty,  F.H.A.  subsidy,  and  present-day  tax  law. 


84 


The  Art  of  Community 


All  the  lines  are  now  black  to  indicate  firm  authority,  both  private  and 
public,  over  land.  The  custom  of  property  now  gives  security  to  individ- 
ual users  at  the  same  time  that  it  leaves  the  pattern  of  land  uses  in  the 
community  flexible.  It  aff'ords  a  means  whereby  the  basic  pattern  can  be 
changed,  gradually  and  continuously  as  leaseholds  revert,  according  to 
the  evolving  character  of  the  demand  for  land  in  the  community. 

The  series  from  volunteer  to  fully  proprietary  community  represents  a 
logical  ordering  only.  It  does  not  correspond  to  any  known  historical  or 
chronological  process  or  development.  The  differences  between  the 
stages  can  be  summarized  in  the  following  way: 


I  II 

Administration  Administration 
of  all  by  all.      by  all  of 
common 
areas  only. 


HI 

Administration 
of  common 
areas  by 
adjacent 
owners  only. 


IV  V 
Administration  Administration 


of  common 
areas  by 
adjacent 
owners  only 
and  in 

proportion  to 
their  separate 
holdings. 


of  all  as  a 
unit  by  the 
organized 
owners  of  the 
entire 

community. 


All  of  the  forms  to  the  right  of  I  are  distinguished  by  the  presence  of 
rules  of  property  for  the  determination  of  private  land  uses.  Even  where 
title  is  not  unitary,  property  in  land  brings  with  it  definite  advantages.  It 
brings  not  only  security  of  possession,  but  flexibility  in  land  use.  For  each 
new  commitment  of  land  to  a  use  need  not  receive  the  detailed  approval 
of  all  the  community  members,  a  practically  impossible  task,  but  only  of 
the  owner  of  the  particular  sites  in  question.  Impasse  is  largely  avoided 
because  the  social  authority  to  commit  the  use  of  the  property  is 
conveyed  by  the  others'  recognition  of  one's  ownership. 

Short  of  the  fully-developed  proprietary  community,  a  degree  of 
"mobility"  accrues  to  real  property  by  virtue  of  the  fact  that  its 
ownership  can  be  bought,  sold,  and  exchanged.  Gradually  sites  in  a 
community  are  acquired  for  new  uses  in  the  proximity  of  sites  already 
being  put  to  compatible  and  complementary  uses— as,  for  example,  a 
haberdasher  acquiring  a  site  for  his  business  in  the  retailing  section  of 
town,  or  a  manufacturer  locating  adjacent  to  railroad  and  docking 
facilities.  The  land-use  pattern  of  a  community  thus  gradually  evolves. 
But  this  "mobility"  is  still  far  less  than  the  actual  mobility  of  tangible 
properties.  The  resulting  market  lag  leads  to  a  gradual  impairment  of  the 
available  uses  of  sites  in  the  community  or  neighborhood  by  the 


The  Nature  of  Community  Organization 


85 


conflicting  uses  of  surrounding  property.  This  condition  of  paralysis  over 
an  area  has  received  the  descriptive  name  of  urban  blight.  The  process 
tends  to  accelerate  according  to  the  smallness  of  the  units  separately 
owned. 

Even  with  fragmented  land  title,  the  mere  recognition  of  ownership 
has  the  advantage  that  it  permits  individual  security  of  use  and  a  degree 
of  flexibiUty  in  the  land-use  pattern.  It  allows  also  the  possibility  that  free 
trading  in  land  will  result  in  the  consolidation  of  small  ownerships.  Large 
administrative  units  can  be  put  together  by  the  acquisition  of  lesser 
parcels,  either  in  fee  or  in  leasehold  or  in  combinations  of  both.  As  titles 
combine,  pressures  and  conflicts  decline  and  sovereignty  is  less  invoked. 

What  is  Sovereignty? 

When  the  land-use  pattern  so  far  ceases  to  function  for  a  community 
that  force  is  called  upon  to  bring  relief  from  threatened  paralysis,  we 
encounter  sovereignty. 

Force  is  not  an  organizing  principle  in  its  own  right— a  basis  for 
association— but  a  natural  and  primitive  expedient  in  crisis.  Force  arises 
in  situations  where  action  is  called  for  but  we  do  not  know  what  kind— 
where  we  are  impelled  to  action  but  do  not  know  what  is  appropriate  to 
accomplish  our  objective,  if  indeed  we  are  clear  what  the  objective  is.  It 
arises  in  those  situations  where  any  kind  of  action  seems  preferable  to  no 
action.  The  exercise  of  force  in  community  aff'airs  indicates  a  lack  of 
understanding  of  alternatives,  an  insufficiency  of  social  technology.  It 
represents  not  a  kind  of  social  organization,  but  the  lack  of  it. 

Force  is  the  manipulation  of  a  person  or  thing  in  disregard  of  its  own 
volition  or  nature.  In  society,  force  is  violence  to  property.  To  appropri- 
ate another's  property  is  to  disregard  that  person's  social  nature,  for  it 
destroys  his  functional  capacity  which  is  the  prime  attribute  of  a  person 
in  society.  To  restrain  his  person  is  to  do  violence  to  his  most  intimate 
property. 

By  interfering  with  an  individual's  functioning  in  his  social  role  as 
owner  or  custodian  of  a  part  of  the  resources  of  the  community,  force  is 
dysfunctional  not  only  for  the  individual,  but  also  for  the  community  of 
which  he  is  part.  This  is  not  to  say  that  force  need  be  dysfunctional  in 
every  circumstance.  For  while  it  is  true  that  a  given  individual  cannot  be 
an  asset  to  the  community  while  under  restraints,  it  may  be  that  his  active 
inclination  at  the  moment  is  to  disrupt  the  aff'airs  of  others.  In  the 
absence  of  knowing  how  to  restore  this  person  to  social  cooperation  and 


86 


The  Art  of  Community 


so  realize  his  potential  value  to  the  whole  community,  a  crisis  exists  in 
which  force  may  be  the  only  response  available.  That  force  may  not  be 
dysfunctional  under  the  given  circumstances.  But  neither  is  it  functional 
in  any  positive  sense  since  it  does  not  restore  that  person's  social 
functioning,  and  it  neutralizes  him  who  is  asserting  the  force  from  any 
positive  role  in  society.  Even  in  these  circumstances,  moreover,  it  makes 
as  little  sense  to  insist  that  he  who  asserts  the  force  has  a  right  to  do  so- 
even  defensively— as  to  insist  that  he  has  a  right  to  act  ignorantly.  That  he 
will  do  so  on  occasion  is  not  in  dispute,  only  that  he  can  ever  vindicate 
himself  on  those  occasions  by  appealing  to  criteria  of  right  and  wrong.  It 
is  not  a  question  of  morality;  //  is  simply  unfortunate,  many  times  tragic. 
The  challenge  and  opportunity  for  mankind,  the  way  of  civilization,  is 
constantly  to  discover  the  alternatives. 

For  the  present  discussion  of  sovereignty— which  follows  generally  the 
analysis  formulated  by  the  early  nineteenth-century  jurist,  John  Austin- 
government,  or  sovereignty,  will  be  defined  as  institutionalized  force. 
Force  in  turn,  for  analytic  conciseness,  will  be  defined  as  interference 
with  property.  The  discussion,  therefore,  will  concern  the  systematic 
limitations  on  property  in  community  life.  Depending  on  the  context,  the 
term  sovereignty  v/iW  refer  either  to  the  application  of  the  force  itself  or  to 
the  established  machinery  of  power. 

There  are,  basically,  three  ways  that  property  can  be  infringed.  Its  use 
can  be  restricted  or  circumscribed;  the  property  itself  can  be  taken 
outright  as  a  whole;  or  it  can  be  taken  in  part.  These  three  possibliities 
correspond  to  what  is  regarded  in  political  science  as  the  three  separate 
powers  of  sovereignty,  namely,  the  police  power,  the  power  of  eminent 
domain,  and  the  taxing  power— the  powers  to  regulate,  to  expropriate, 
and  to  tax.  These  three  are  the  basic  powers  inherent  in  sovereignty 
above  and  beyond  any  and  all  constitutional  or  other  provisions  relating 
to  form  or  procedure  of  government. 

The  origin  of  the  state  is  a  question  that  has  commanded  increasing 
attention  in  anthropology  in  recent  years.  It  has  become  evident  that 
states  have  developed  not  once  but  many  times  from  non-state  condi- 
tions. Certainly  a  generic  cause  is  the  inflexibility  of  a  subdivided  land- 
use  pattern.  This  will  be  developed  briefly,  below.  Other  possible  stimuli 
are  considered  in  the  next  and  final  chapter,  which  is  concerned  with 
historical  questions  and  process  of  change. 

In  the  conflicts  of  land  interest  that  tend  to  develop  especially  in  those 
societies  having  more  specializations  of  land  use,  as  opposed  to  the 
village  community  where  land  use  is  relatively  homogeneous,  the 


The  Nature  of  Community  Organization 


87 


employment  of  force  by  some  community  members  against  others  may 
bring  temporary  relief  for  some.  But  it  does  not  solve  the  underlying 
problem,  which  is  the  inflexibility  of  the  existing  land-use  pattern.  When 
an  impasse  reaches  a  crisis  affecting  a  considerable  number  of  people  in 
the  community,  then  a  portion  of  the  population  frequently  assumes  an 
expropriative  power  over  other  members  sufficient  to  restructure  the 
situation  closer  to  the  "public  interest."  Once  such  a  machinery  of 
expropriation  is  set  up,  however,  the  question  of  common  interest  must 
be  interpreted  and  the  machinery  of  power  must  be  administered— by 
members  of  the  same  population  that  finds  itself  divided  in  conflict.  The 
former  impasse  is  transformed  into  active  rivalry  in  the  push  and  pull  to 
influence  both  the  formulation  of  policy  and  the  administration  of  the 
program  in  ways  that  would  least  likely  impair  or  most  likely  favor  each 
person's  private  interest  at  the  expense  of  others.  The  outcome  seldom 
coincides  with  the  public  interest,  however  that  might  be  determined,  for 
it  will  be  skewed  and  distorted  in  the  rivalry  leading  to  it.  The  best 
reasonable  hope  is  that  the  public  interest  will  be  approximated. 

To  cast  the  thought  in  another  form,  where  land  is  held  in  divided  title, 
the  common  interest  in  not  represented.  Yet  someone  must  speak  and  act 
for  it.  If  there  is  a  sovereign  authority,  it  is  hobbled  by  the  demands  of 
political  expediency.  The  public,  on  the  other  hand,  is  hobbled  by  its 
multiplicity  of  separate  interests,  none  of  which  coincide  with  the  whole 
public  interest.  If  there  is  no  sovereignty,  then,  when  the  lack  of  any 
assertion  of  the  common  interest  becomes  critical,  the  citizens  may 
attempt  to  overcome  their  own  diversity  of  interests  by  establishing  one— 
to  accomplish  by  force  such  actions  as  may  seem  necessary  for  the 
general  interest,  eff"ecting  a  compromise  by  necessarily  hurting  or 
overriding  the  interests  of  some  of  their  number.  But  the  very  division  of 
interests  which  prompted  them  to  such  a  step  causes  the  citizens  to  bring 
so  many  pressures  to  bear  on  the  way  the  power  created  is  used— both  in 
the  selection  of  objectives  and  in  the  way  these  are  carried  out— as  to 
destroy  the  very  ends  they  set  out  to  attain. 

Nor  would  it  be  in  any  private  interest  to  have  a  sovereignty  that  would 
pursue  its  course  rigidly.  Inasmuch  as  sovereignty  is  expropriative,  the 
flexibility  in  the  give  and  take  of  political  maneuvering  affords  some 
recourse  should  one's  own  interests  be  threatened.  The  prudent  individ- 
ual tolerates  slippage  in  governmental  machinery  as  insurance  against  a 
time  when  he  might  have  nothing  else  to  fall  back  on  to  protect  his  own 
self-interest.  Nor,  hopefully,  would  he  deny  the  same  security  to  others. 

Thus  sovereignty  originates  in  a  deficiency  condition  in  the 
community— a  deficiency  of  organization.  It  represents  a  crisis  in 


88 


The  Art  of  Community 


community  administration.  The  attributes  of  a  community  in  a  state  of 
sovereignty  differ  remarkably  from  those  of  a  fully  developed  proprie- 
tary community: 

1.  Integrity.  Conflicts  of  interest  occur  on  three  levels  in  communities 
under  sovereignty.  First,  private  interests  come  into  conflict  with  one 
another  over  the  lack  of  coordination  of  land  uses.  Secondly,  private 
interests  find  themselves  in  chronic  conflict  with  the  "public  interest" 
because  the  sovereign  authority  survives  and  operates  wholly  by  the 
systematic  expropriation  of  property  through  taxation.  Thirdly,  the 
personal  self-interest  of  the  public  officer  conflicts  with  his  role,  for  his 
self-interest  is  to  stay  in  office,  yet  to  stay  in  office  requires  compromising 
the  public  interest  at  many  points.  All  of  these  conflicts  characterize  the 
sovereign,  but  none  the  proprietary,  community. 

2.  Role  Definition.  In  comparison  with  that  of  a  sovereign  official,  the 
role  of  an  owner  is  clearly  defined.  His  obligations  toward  his  tenants  are 
detailed  in  the  lease  agreements  negotiated  with  each.  The  role  of  the 
sovereign  official,  on  the  other  hand,  is  ambiguous.  It  is  complicated  by 
the  fact  that  he  is  seldom  free  to  act  at  his  own  discretion  to  further  the 
public  interest  even  as  he  understands  it.  The  ambiguity  stems  from  the 
fact  that  his  own  self-interest  and  that  of  the  community  are  not 
coordinate,  so  that  it  is  impossible  to  serve  both  consistently.  Is  his  role  to 
hold  office,  or  to  serve  the  public  interest?  Since  the  second  depends  on 
the  first,  the  sovereign  can  always  rationalize,  as  pursuit  of  the  first,  his 
compromise  of  the  second. 

This  poses  a  dilemma  for  the  conscientious  public  administrator  who  is 
willing  to  sacrifice  his  own  interest  in  favor  of  the  community.  He  must 
hold  office  before  he  can  hope  to  serve  the  public,  but  in  order  to  gain 
office,  he  regularly  must  compromise  his  own  informed  judgment  in 
order  to  please  those  who  he  thinks  can  help  him  get  there.  They  expect 
him  in  turn,  once  he  is  in  office,  to  represent  their  views  instead  of  his 
own;  so  indebtedness  begins  in  office.  Moreover,  he  must  continue  to 
compromise  in  order  to  keep  in  office.  His  private  interest— to  be  an  office 
holder— is  therefore  at  odds  with  the  public  interest.  The  means  are 
incompatible  with  the  end.  For  he  must  continue  to  try  to  satisfy  those 
who  put  him  in  power— party  officials  and  segments  of  the  public  whose 
interests  are  not  coextensive  with  the  public  interest.  By  the  nature  of  the 
problem  he  cannot  succeed  even  in  this,  for  he  cannot  be  all  things  to  all 
men.  But  that  is  what  he  must  attempt. 

3.  Authority.  The  greatest  dilemma  of  the  public  officer  in  a  sovereign 
community  is  his  lack  of  authority.  He  is  a  non-owner  attempting  to 


The  Nature  of  Community  Organization 


89 


administer  property  of  others.  The  administrator  of  a  proprietary 
community,  on  the  other  hand,  faces  no  such  problem,  for  his  adminis- 
tration is  founded  on  the  universal  consensus  of  property,  rather  than  the 
precarious  balancing  of  favor  from  divided  elements  of  the  population. 
The  proprietor  is  free  to  exercise  his  own  judgment,  for  he  has  social 
authority  that  his  counterpart  on  the  shifting  ground  of  sovereignty 
lacks. 

The  quasi-authority  of  force  displayed  by  a  sovereign  is  altogether 
different  from  the  social  authority  of  ownership.  It  must  be  monopolized 
by  the  state,  whereas  the  authority  of  ownership  exercised  by  the 
administrators  of  a  proprietary  community  is  the  same  in  kind  as  the 
authority  which  pervades  the  community  at  all  levels  of  its  daily  life.* 

4.  Finance.  The  sovereign  public  authority  is  financed  by  taxes,  the 
proprietary  by  rents.  There  are  at  least  two  important  differences 
between  rent  and  taxes,  at  least  two  ways  to  distinguish  them.  First,  the 
payment  of  rent  follows  from  individual  negotiation  and  agreement. 
Taxes,  on  the  other  hand,  are  assessed  without  regard  for  the  wishes  of 
individuals  and  are  collected,  if  need  be,  by  force.  Neither  the  amount  of 
assessment,  nor  the  way  in  which  payment  shall  be  made,  nor  the  kind  or 
extent  of  services  the  public  authority  may  provide,  are  subject  to 
individual  negotiation. 

Secondly,  rent  is  a  definite  amount  for  the  term  of  the  agreement, 
whereas  taxes  can  be  changed  at  any  time,  unilaterally,  by  appropriate 
legislation. 

A  further  distinction  between  rent  and  taxes  is  that  rents  follow,  rather 
than  precede,  the  improvement  of  land  and  are  paid  for  services  actually 
rendered  rather  than  for  services  which  are  only  anticipated.  Rent  is 
recompense.  It  is  reciprocity  for  the  service  of  transferring  social 
jurisdiction  over  desirable  land.  Taxes,  on  the  other  hand,  must  be 
collected  prior  even  to  the  possibility  of  public  improvements,  hence  are 
reciprocal  in  anticipation  or  hope  only. 

Finally,  the  proprietary  authority  improves  its  own  land  and  then 
administers  it  in  ways  that  produce  income.  This  rent  income  can  then  be 
invested  in  further  improving  or  maintaining  the  property,  which  creates 
further  demand  and  additional  rent  income.  But  taxes  must  be  collected 

*The  distinction  recalls  an  observation  repeated  many  times  by  the  prehistorian,  V. 
Gordon  Childe,  in  discussing  the  rise  of  city  states  and  the  first  appearances  of  sovereignty. 
He  observed  that  community  headship  underwent  a  qualitative  change,  that  kingship 
emerged  out  of  society,  was  raised  above  it.  "* 


90 


The  Art  of  Community 


in  reverse  order,  in  advance  of  public  improvements,  since  the  sovereign 
authority  has  no  property  of  its  own  to  improve  or  administer  and 
consequently  no  funds.  Not  being  an  owning  authority,  its  operations 
cannot  produce  a  recompense  in  the  market.  It  is  without  funds  except 
for  what  it  can  collect  by  force.  It  runs  continuously  at  a  deficit  which  can 
only  be  made  up  by  more  taxation,  instead  of  being  a  self-sustaining 
enterprise  as  is  the  administration  of  a  capital  property  by  its  owners. 

5.  Incentive.  Sovereignty  further  contrasts  with  proprietary  administra- 
tion in  its  lack  of  incentive  for  the  improvement  of  land  or  other 
provision  for  the  public  welfare.  Since  it  has  no  property  of  its  own,  every 
act  of  the  sovereignty  depends  upon  its  taking  property  from  others, 
thereby  impinging  on  persons  whose  good  will  might  be  or  become  a 
factor  in  keeping  the  public  officer  in  power.  Therefore,  taxing  bodies  are 
reluctant  to  act.  Unspectacular  but  necessary  public  works  for  which 
taxes  have  been  collected  in  advance,  hold  no  prospect  of  reward  for  the 
office  holder  to  provide  him  with  positive  motivation  for  their  perform- 
ance. They  represent  only  danger  should  they  work  out  badly  or  draw 
criticism.  Furthermore,  the  doing,  as  in  all  expenditure  of  tax  funds,  may 
involve  further  expropriation  in  the  form  of  eminent  domain  or  require 
the  enforcement  of  regulations  under  the  police  power,  both  with  their 
attendant  risks. 

Self-interest  dictates  that  the  public  administrator  spend  tax  funds  in 
ways  calculated  to  continue  him  in  office.  This  is  both  the  safest  and  his 
most  rewarding  course  of  action.  His  motive  toward  the  public  interest  is 
necessarily  a  negative  one— to  hold  his  position— since  there  is  little 
opportunity  to  advance  himself  by  the  forthright  prosecution  of  the 
public  interest  as  there  is  in  all  private  business  and  in  proprietary 
community  organization.  As  a  trustee  of  funds  that  are  not  his  own,  the 
public  administrator  is  committed  to  a  conservative  course  in  terms  of 
what  is  acceptable  to  the  electorate.  Successful  innovation  holds  no 
reward,  and  failure  is  worse  than  merely  the  financial  loss;  if  discovered, 
the  administrator  is  considered  guilty  of  misfeasance.  Sovereignty 
therefore  is  a  reluctant  machinery  of  public  administration  that  in 
serving  the  public  tends  always  to  move  from  crisis  to  crisis,  rather  than 
from  opportunity  to  opportunity  as  in  proprietary  enterprise. 

We  can  speculate  whether  the  conflict  of  general  and  particular 
interests  under  sovereignty  may  not  provide  a  possible  functional 
explanation  of  the  prominence  of  self-sacrifice  in  Western  ethos  and 
religion.  To  the  extent  that  it  influenced  behavior,  such  an  ethos  would  be 
functional  for  the  public  good  in  situations  where  the  public  good  often 


The  Nature  of  Community  Organization 


91 


can  be  secured  only  by  the  self-sacrifice  of  personal  interests  by  private 
and  public  people  alike.  The  demand  for  sacrificial  behavior  is  apparent 
on  every  hand  where  public  problems  are  discussed.  Professional  men 
and  women  are  continually  importuned  to  donate  their  time  and  skill  to 
the  community.  A  single  example  concerns  the  plight  of  downtown 
business  districts.  Virtually  everything  that  has  been  written  on  the 
subject  urging  a  "solution"  either  calls  for  sacrificial  behavior  or  else 
deplores  its  lack  as  uncooperative,  selfish,  opportunistic,  unreasonable, 
unsocial,  and  so  forth.  On  the  other  hand,  civic-mindedness,  public  spirit, 
and  social  conscience  are  frequent  euphemisms  for  self-sacrifice  in  the 
interest  of  the  collective  welfare.  Characteristic  is  the  following  state- 
ment from  an  article  by  a  leading  developer: 

In  most  cities  new  powers  will  be  required  to  carry  out  the  plan.  This  need  not 
frighten  us.  .  .  .  Without  the  necessary  power,  unreasonable,  uncooperative, 
or  simply  uninterested  property  owners  will  endlessly  frustrate  the  finest 
efforts  to  remake  the  city  into  what  it  ought  to  be.  The  development  and 
execution  of  a  bold  and  effective  downtown  plan  will  require  the  vigorous 
and  dedicated  leadership  of  merchants,  bankers,  and  the  entire  business 
community.  ...  It  will  mean  substantial  sacrifice  by  some  business  and 
property  owners.  ' 

Self-sacrifice  benefits  society  wherever  it  alleviates  the  need  of  overt 
force,  with  its  potentially  disruptive  effects,  being  employed  in  situations 
where  public  policy  and  private  interest  collide. 

The  coincidence  of  general  and  particular  interests  in  the  proprietary 
community,  on  the  other  hand,  is  more  than  a  stimulus  toward  individual 
and  collective  accomplishment.  It  also  provides  a  safeguard.  As  the 
proprietor  exercises  sound  judgment  in  the  administration  of  commu- 
nity affairs,  his  self-interest  is  served  and  he  finds  himself  in  position  to 
exercise  his  judgment  over  a  wider  field.  As  his  judgment  proves 
unsound,  its  field  diminishes  until  he  finds  himself  no  longer  in  business 
at  all. 

His  sovereign  counterpart,  by  contrast,  so  long  as  he  manages  to 
control  those  he  can  and  to  please  those  he  cannot  otherwise  control,  and 
so  long  as  there  remains  enough  productive  enterprise  in  the  community 
to  support  the  power  structure,  can  expand  his  role  in  virtual  disregard  of 
the  public  interest.  Inefficiency  in  advancing  the  community  interest  is 
not  penalized.  Contrived  limitations  such  as  constitutions  are  attempts  to 
make  the  sovereignty  limit  itself,  and  as  such  represent  another  example 
of  appeal  to  the  ethos  of  self-sacrifice.  A  constitution  can  be  only  a  paper 
limitation  in  the  long  run,  since  its  interpretation  and  its  enforcement 


92 


The  Art  of  Community 


both  must  be  left  to  the  same  power  it  is  intended  to  restrain,  there  being 
none  other  to  speak  for  the  pubUc. 

Bad  management  cannot  long  be  concealed  in  a  proprietary  enterprise. 
The  equities  market  is  sensitive  to  management  decisions  and  registers 
its  adverse  judgments  by  declining  values.  This  signal  is  an  invitation  to 
others  to  bid  into  the  ownership  and  restore  the  enterprise  to  an  efficient 
level  of  operation.  The  same  result  need  not  wait  on  price  signals,  even, 
since  anyone,  seeing  a  way  to  improve  the  management  of  a  business, 
has  an  incentive  to  buy  into  the  ownership  or  otherwise  associate  himself 
with  the  venture.  In  a  sovereign  structure,  on  the  other  hand,  there  is  no 
accounting  to  owners  for  efficiency  of  operation  and  no  corresponding 
opportunity  to  remedy  or  improve  management.  The  result  is  a  rigid 
structure  marked  by  gradual  deterioration  and  by  intermittent  and 
violent  revolutions.  Nor  when  change  does  occur,  is  there  anything 
fundamental  in  the  nature  of  the  change  to  suggest  the  likelihood  of 
improvement.  By  contrast,  in  the  proprietary  enterprise,  those  with 
sufficient  resources  to  buy  into  the  ownership  are  likely  to  be  experienced 
in  business,  and  each  new  venture  demands  and  rewards  their  construc- 
tive efforts. 

Sovereignty  does  not  follow  directly  from  weak  organization  any  more 
than  fever  in  an  organism  is  the  direct  result  of  a  weak  constitution.  It  is 
responsive  to  crisis  situations,  which  are  most  likely  to  develop— whether 
from  internal  or  external  conditions  of  stress— in  communities  that  are 
least  well  administered.  The  crises  may  be  caused  by  either  internal 
conditions  of  stress,  such  as  those  mainly  dealt  with  in  this  book,  or  by 
conditions  externally  imposed.  In  either  case,  if  the  crises  are  of  short 
duration,  the  force  response  like  the  fever  subsides.  But  where  crises 
continue  over  a  long  period,  the  force  response  becomes  habitual  and 
self-perpetuating  in  the  community. 

Kinship 

Kinship  in  early  society  serves  functions  analogous  to  those  of  contract 
in  modern  industrial  society.  Kinship  and  contract,  each  in  its  own 
setting,  afford  alternative  bases  for  recruiting  and  sorting  people  into 
roles  in  varying  patterns  of  cooperation. 

Roles,  just  as  tasks  of  any  kind,  require  resources  for  their  perform- 
ance. Thus  at  either  level  of  society,  they  presuppose  the  institution  of 
property.  From  the  infinitude  of  possible  ways  of  dividing  the  resources 
of  the  world  by  the  convention  of  property— limited  only  by  the  power  of 


The  Nature  of  Community  Organization 


93 


the  imagination  to  conceive  of  new  uses— people  equip  themselves  for 
their  tasks  by  constantly  making  such  divisions  and  assembling  more  or 
less  functional  property  bundles,  or  portfolios,  to  correspond  with  the 
roles  they  anticipate  for  themselves. 

Systems  of  roles— social  structures— evolve  as  people  relate  in  coopera- 
tive ways  to  accomplish  results  they  cannot  accomplish  separately,  or  as 
well.  Those  structures  that  achieve  continuity  by  providing  for  the 
regular  substitution  of  new  participants  to  fill  its  roles  as  old  ones  drop 
out,  are  called  corporations. 

An  important  event  for  nineteenth-century  social  science  was  the 
discovery  that  not  all  corporations  recruit  their  members  contractually.  A 
significant  number  in  the  world  recruit  their  membership  through 
kinship  systems.  These  systems,  highly  sophisticated  and  complex  in 
many  primitive  societies,  especially  in  those  societies  least  affected  by 
sovereignty,  have  engaged  the  major  analytic  efforts  of  anthropologists 
for  over  half  a  century. 

Kinship  corporations  are  distinctive  not  only  in  their  method  of 
recruitment.  They  are  general-purpose  and  multifunctional,  embracing 
both  production  and  consumption.  They  are  designed  to  accommodate 
automatically  all  of  the  members  of  a  population,  provided  only  that  the 
population  be  sufficiently  small  (usually  less  than  a  thousand  members), 
stable,  and  biologically  self-perpetuating.  Their  members,  born  into  the 
corporation,  occupy  sets  of  roles  within  it  that  change  as  their  life-cycles 
unfold.  Kinship  calculus  provides  by  regular  rules  of  marriage  and 
descent  for  the  orderly  succession  of  property  among  the  members— a 
function  that  kinship  systems  in  truncated  form  still  perform  in  indus- 
trial society. 

Until  rather  recently,  as  time  is  measured  in  evolutionary  terms,  the 
calculus  of  kinship  was  the  only  way  of  promoting  and  integrating  the 
use  of  resources  in  human  affairs.  The  tendency  of  this  social  technology 
to  be  cumbersome  and  resistant  to  change  was  compensated  by  the 
fiction  of  adoption  and  other  devices  that  greatly  added  to  its  flexibility. 
But  the  idiom  remained  refractory  and  too  limiting.  The  breakthrough  in 
human  social  organization  occurred  when  corporations  could  be  assem- 
bled by  individually  negotiated  contracts  for  performance  of  specific 
functions  and  by  recruiting  talent  without  regard  for  kinship.  This 
foreshadowed  the  significant  advance  from  the  kinship  level  of  human 
community  to  the  contractual  level— an  evolutionary  quantum  leap 
between  two  broad  planes  or  levels  of  social  equilibrium.  The  quantum 
leap  is  still  in  progress.  It  seems  long  when  measured  against  individual 


94 


The  Art  of  Community 


lifetimes,  however  brief  in  evolutionary  time.  Almost  the  whole  of 
written  history  is  the  record  of  the  instabilities  and  confusions 
characteristic  of  a  transitional  period. 


CHAPTER  8 


Evolving  Society 

We  may  say  that  the  movement  of  the  progressive  societies  has  been  a 
movement  from  status  to  contract. 

Sir  Henry  Maine 
Ancient  Law 

In  the  light  of  what  is  already  known,  we  have  examined  in  this  book  a 
body  of  data  newly  available  to  the  social  sciences  and  have  generalized 
broadly  about  the  nature  of  communities.  These  generalizations  can  be 
summarized  as  follows: 

There  are  certain  functional  requirements  of  a  community  that  cannot 
adequately  be  met  except  through  an  organized  proprietary  interest  in 
land. 

Therefore,  communities  other  than  those  in  the  proprietary  pattern- 
including  those  most  typical  of  the  growth  and  present  development  of 
Western  civilization— are  not  communities  of  alternate  kind.  Rather, 
they  are  deficient  and  incompletely  organized  departures  from  the 
norm  that  is  represented  by  the  fully  organized  proprietary  community. 
In  this  light,  the  distinction  between  state  and  stateless  societies  which  is 
commonly  made  by  anthropologists  is  significant,  though  not  in  the  way 
it  is  usually  comprehended.  For  in  terms  of  community  structure  and 
function,  states  represent  not  a  social  advance,  but  a  condition  of 
relative  community  disorganization. 

Finally,  there  is  in  contemporary  Western  civilization  a  trend  discern- 
ible on  the  local  level  toward  a  social  reintegration  in  the  proprietary 
pattern,  a  trend  that  has  not  sprung  from  any  conscious  design  but  has 
proceeded  according  to  its  inner  organic  pattern  so  far  as  it  has  not  been 
disturbed  by  the  recurrent  crises  of  civic  affairs. 

The  broad  generalization  is  rich  in  historical  suggestion.  This  chapter 
will  trace  out,  from  some  of  the  data  at  our  command,  an  overall  picture 
or  interpretation  of  history  that  seems  quite  consistent  if  not  wholly 
implicit  in  it. 

The  earliest  picture  of  social  man  that  can  be  constructed  from  present 
evidence  is  one  of  early  bands  of  hunters  and  gatherers,  their  members 
already  observing  the  propriety  of  property  with  respect  to  their 
individual  persons,  items  of  personal  property,  and  the  lands  over  which 


96 


The  Art  of  Community 


they  hunted  and  gathered  food.  The  development  of  the  proprietary 
principle  with  respect  to  land  varied  in  each  case  with  the  particular 
ecological  adaptation  of  the  group,  but  the  pattern  of  that  development 
tended  regularly  to  be  one  in  which  the  distributive  function,  so  far  as  it 
was  required,  was  entrusted  to  a  senior  member  of  the  kin  group. 

Subsequent  progress  until  very  recent  centuries  came  slowly,  perhaps 
because  of  the  chicken-and-egg  dilemma,  each  factor  of  a  progressive 
market  economy  being  dependent  in  turn  on  a  complex  of  many  others 
which  were  likewise  non-existent.  Population  was  too  little  and  transac- 
tions too  few  to  constitute  an  active  market  on  which  to  predicate  new- 
product  development,  even  had  there  been  sufficient  capital  accumula- 
tion. Accountancy  was  rudimentary  at  best.  Perhaps  most  important— 
though  it  may  be  doubtful  if  priority  can  be  assigned— is  the  fact  that  the 
business  firm  or  its  equivalent  had  not  evolved  independently  of  the 
family  as  a  specialized  productive  unit.  At  least  some  studies  suggest  that 
without  this  radical  and  historically  recent  development,  markets  could 
never  have  transcended  the  level  of  the  peasant  bazaar.^ 

When  some  of  these  early  bands  developed  food  cultivation  and 
established  permanent  communities,  the  head  or  eldest  of  the  kin  group 
readily  assumed  the  administrative  functions  of  village  headman.  The 
new  requirements  were  easily  accommodated  within  the  existing  social 
structure,  the  basic  pattern  of  which  had  long  been, established.  Hence, 
the  transition  from  a  mobile  hfe  of  hunting  and  gathering  to  settled 
village  life,  so  long  regarded  as  a  major  turning  point,  was  actually  an 
event  of  minor  importance  in  the  evolution  of  human  society.  The 
significant  change  occurred  much  later,  in  the  transition  to  manorial 
forms  and  institutions,  as  property  and  contract  differentiated  out  of 
kinship.  At  that  juncture  the  institution  of  property  and  exchange  began 
developing  in  the  idiom  of  contract,  which  differed  from  kinship's  idiom 
of  the  gift  by  being  impersonal  and,  thereby,  potential  for  becoming 
universal.  It  was  destined  eventually  to  transcend  the  limitations  of  the 
narrow  biological  group  and,  for  the  first  time  in  the  natural  history  of 
life,  to  extend  the  practice  of  reciprocity,  or  mutual  aid,  to  the  outer  limit 
of  a  species. 

Such  separation  of  property  from  kinship  might  have  been  promoted, 
as  historian  Arnold  Toynbee  suggests,  wherever  a  marine  migration  had 
a  tendency,  because  of  the  recruitment  of  boat  crews  across  kinship  lines, 
to  break  up  existing  family  ties.^  It  may  also  have  been  promoted  by  the 
addition  to  the  village  of  other  groups  who  consented  to  pay  rent  or  rent 
service  to  the  original  inhabitants  without  adopting  a  kinship  relation  to 
them,  the  original  members  becoming  thereby  a  landlord  class. 


Evolving  Society 


97 


In  the  settlement  of  the  deha  region  of  the  Tigris  and  Euphrates 
rivers,  long  considered  the  Garden  of  Eden  of  Western  civilization, 
both  factors  may  have  been  at  work.  Archeological  findings  of  recent 
years  have  put  the  initial  settlement  of  the  delta  lands  at  a  point  of  time 
in  prehistory  several  thousand  years  after  the  basic  techniques  of 
farming  had  been  developed  elsewhere  in  rain-fall  areas.  Irrigation  was 
the  significant  innovation  within  the  already  well  established  technology 
of  food  production  that  made  settlement  of  the  practically  rain-free  delta 
lands  possible.  Colonization  by  marine  or  riverine  migrations,  with 
subsequent  arrivals  welcomed  as  recruits  to  help  extend  the  irrigation 
systems,  must  have  contributed  to  conditions  favoring  the  development 
of  manorial  institutions  of  which  there  is  much  evidence  in  the  early  rise 
of  towns.  In  the  absence  of  integrating  kinship  ties,  the  responsibility  for 
community  administration  must  naturally  have  devolved  on  the  leaders 
of  the  migration  and  have  included  responsibility  for  the  construction 
and  maintenance  of  irrigation  systems,  financed  by  customary  returns  of 
rent  and  services  according  to  benefits  conferred. 

Unwittingly,  however,  these  early  colonists  in  the  delta  lands  had 
ventured  into  a  ecological  trap  in  which,  for  a  later  generation,  the 
development  of  sovereignty  was  virtually  certain. 

As  population  increased  under  the  high  productivity  of  irrigation 
farming  and  as  villages  and  then  towns  multiplied  along  the  banks  of  the 
rivers  on  which  they  depended  for  their  water,  conflicts  developed  over 
the  diversion  of  water  by  communities  upstream  that  adversely  affected 
those  downstream.  From  isolated  charges  and  recriminations  and 
sporadic  raiding  in  the  beginning,  the  conflict  intensified  under  increas- 
ing population  pressure  as  more  and  more  vain  attempts  were  made  to 
restore  equilibrium.  The  proprietary-community  pattern  may  have  been 
fully  developed  within  each  town,  but  the  crisis  stemmed  from  the 
divisions  of  land  administration  within  the  now  more  inclusive  area.  The 
gradually  rising  level  of  hostihties  was  paralleled  within  each  community 
by  the  growing  need  for  defensive  preparations.  The  critical  point  was 
passed  when  the  warrior  role  became  institutionalized  in  a  standing  war 
organization  within  one  or  more  of  the  communities  instead  of  continu- 
ing ad  hoc,  relegated  outside  of  normal  community  life,  according  to  the 
pattern  observed  to  prevail  among  communities  of  stateless  societies 
throughout  the  world. 

Thus  the  precondition  of  sovereignty  in  the  delta  region  of  the  Tigris 
and  Euphrates  need  not  have  been,  as  Karl  Wittfogel  and  some  other 
writers  have  suggested,  the  need  of  the  communities  for  public-works 
programs."  According  to  that  view,  a  village  facing  the  need  of  construct- 


98 


The  Art  of  Community 


ing  heavy  land  improvements  such  as  irrigation  systems  had  to  evolve 
sovereignty  in  order  to  levy  the  needed  labor  force  from  the  local 
population.  Later  on,  the  control  of  these  very  facilities  enabled  the 
sovereign  authority  to  continue  its  oppressive  hold  on  the  population. 
The  alternative  view  is  that  sovereignty  arose  after  the  towns  were 
already  long  established  in  the  use  of  irrigation  systems.  It  arose  in 
response  to  a  deficiency  of  regional  administration  reflecting  the 
fragmentation  of  land  authority  among  the  diff'erent  towns,  a  situation 
which  became  increasingly  critical  with  the  extension  of  irrigation  and 
increased  use  of  water,  until  the  spark  of  sovereignty  ignited  in  one  or 
more  of  the  towns.  This  hypothesis  is  consistent  with  the  archeological 
evidence  that  kingship,  rather  than  coinciding  with  the  beginnings  of  the 
urban  revolution,  developed  after  it  was  already  well  advanced  in  the 
manorial  pattern— the  centers  of  administration  being  the  temples,  the 
lands  of  each  town  being  owned  nominally  by  the  god  of  that  town  and 
administered  by  the  temple  officials  as  the  stewards  of  the  estate. 
Temples  were  the  administrative  centers  of  an  economic  nature  long 
before  kingly  palaces  appear  in  the  archeological  record.  ' 

Once  established  in  Mesopotamia,  the  condition  of  sovereignty  spread 
rapidly  over  the  rest  of  the  Near  East  by  a  kind  of  chain  reaction.  The 
reaction  need  not  have  involved  conquest  in  every  case.  For  sovereignty 
presents  not  an  occasional  or  sporadic  threat  to  a  neighboring  people, 
but  a  continuing  danger  that  can  only  be  met  by  sustained  readiness  for 
defense.  If  not  immediately  overwhelmed,  the  neighboring  community 
must  in  time  take  on  its  own  sovereign  hue.  The  process  doubtless  was 
hastened  by  the  outward  show  attending  the  persons  of  warriors  and 
rulers.  Such  display  tends  always  to  impress  neighboring  peoples  and  to 
make  their  own  institutions  seem  less  by  comparison,  at  the  same  time 
that  it  touches  the  ambitions  of  the  restless. 

Other  examples  besides  the  Sumerian  experience  illustrate  the  crisis 
that  precipitates  sovereignty  out  of  pre-state  conditions.  Such  was  the 
experience  of  the  Cherokee  villages  of  the  first  half  of  the  eighteenth 
century.  When  that  century  opened,  the  Cherokee  occupied  some  thirty- 
five  to  forty  villages  ranging  in  size  from  350  to  500  people  each, 
distributed  through  the  Great  Smoky  Mountains  at  the  juncture  of 
present-day  North  and  South  Carolina,  Georgia  and  Tennessee.  The 
villages  were  wholly  autonomous.  They  enjoyed  a  common  language  and 
general  traditions  and  frequently  joined  in  fighting  against  common 
enemies,  but  the  aff"airs  of  each  were  decided  solely  within  each  village. 
Warfare  was  endemic  among  the  Indian  groups  with  whom  the  Cherokee 
were  in  contact,  especially  the  Creek  and  Shawnee  to  the  south  and  north. 


Evolving  Society 


99 


and  all  were  supplied  with  arms  by  the  English  in  Charles  Town. 
Occasionally,  incidents  occurred  with  the  English  traders.  These  circum- 
stances set  the  stage  for  the  drama  that  ensued.  The  English,  acting  as  if 
the  Cherokee  were  a  nation  like  themselves  under  a  king,  adopted  the 
policy  after  1730  of  responding  to  incidents  by  imposing  an  arms 
embargo  on  all  of  the  Cherokee,  while  continuing  to  supply  arms  to  their 
enemies.  This  made  every  Cherokee  vulnerable  to  the  consequences  of 
the  hot-headed  acts  of  individuals  entirely  unrelated  to  them  and  living 
in  a  village  possibly  sixty  miles  away.  The  anguish  of  the  Cherokee 
people  during  several  decades  as  they  struggled  against  the  seeming 
impossibility  of  handling  this  crisis  by  any  means  consistent  with  their 
traditional  concepts  of  right  behavior,  is  documented  in  an  ethnohistoric 
study  by  anthropologist  Frederick  Gearing.'  Eventually,  a  standing  war 
organization  was  formed,  in  direct  opposition  to  the  values  of  Cherokee 
life.  The  new  state  was  symbolized  by  the  completion  in  1761  of  a  brick 
jail.  It  was  publicized  among  the  villages  that,  in  the  event  of  an  incident 
with  the  English,  a  war  party  would  be  sent  after  those  involved  to  bring 
them  back  and  hold  them  in  the  jail  until  the  English  came  for  them. 

While  circumstances  differed  in  the  Cherokee  case,  the  nature  of  the 
crisis  was  similar  to  that  which  had  faced  the  Sumerian  towns.  The 
action  which  needed  to  be  coordinated  was  not  the  use  of  water  in 
irrigation,  but  the  treatment  of  Englishmen  who  penetrated  their 
territory.  The  resource  on  which  Cherokee  life  depended  was  in  this 
case  not  water,  but  weapons. 

The  Cherokee  example  and  other  instances  which  might  be  cited 
from  the  growing  record  of  anthropology  help  us  to  understand  better 
the  original  crisis  that  must  have  precipitated  the  sovereignty  which 
dominates  our  Western  tradition.  The  time  and  circumstances  of 
similar  occurrences  in  the  New  World,  and  perhaps  also  independently 
in  India  and  China,  are  the  subject  of  continuing  study  in  archeology. 

During  the  greater  part  of  the  period  of  sovereignty  in  the  Western 
World,  now  lasting  more  than  five  millenia,  the  functions  of  property  in 
land  became  largely  confused  and  obscured.  There  were  exceptions;  a 
single  example  is  the  development  of  manorialism  which  evidently 
followed  the  Anglo-Saxon  migrations  into  England,  culminating  in  the 
Alfredian  Renaissance  before  it  was  subverted  and  finally  overthrown 
by  Norman  influence  and  force  of  arms.  Similar  social  arrangements 
evolved  elsewhere.  As  more  becomes  known  about  the  civilizations  of 
Africa,  we  find  a  wealth  of  evidence  of  manorial  institutions  there. 
Japan  is  a  fertile  field  for  study.  These  developments  and  others  like 


100 


The  Art  of  Community 


them  did  not  last.  In  northern  Europe,  the  relation  of  landlord  and 
tenant  became  that  of  baron  and  serf  in  the  development  of  govern- 
ments consciously  patterned  on  the  model  of  Rome. 

But  developments  over  the  long  period  of  sovereignty  were  not 
insignificant  for  the  eventual  appearance,  almost  unnoticed,  of  proprie- 
tary community  forms  in  modern  commercial  real  estate.  For  gradually, 
in  the  successions  of  civilization  leading  up  to  the  present,  a  market 
economy  evolved  and  men  became  more  sophisticated  in  the  handling  of 
property  of  other  kinds  than  land.  Entrepreneurs  studied  mathematics 
and  devised  means  of  numerical  accountancy,  including,  notably, 
double-entry  bookkeeping.  There  grew  up  a  market  technology  consist- 
ing of  methods  of  transfer  of  credit,  banking,  insurance,  corporate 
structure,  and  all  the  instruments  and  usages  necessary  to  modern 
business.  This  modern  sophistication  in  handling  property  of  other  kinds 
than  land  was  a  necessary  precondition  for  the  recent  growth  of 
commercial  real  estate. 

A  second  major  precondition  besides  the  accumulation  of  market 
technology,  was  the  development  in  Western  Europe  of  free  trade  in  land 
following  the  revolutions  of  the  eighteenth  century.  This  came  about  in 
two  parts.  First,  the  revolutions  themselves  had  the  effect  of  purging  land 
ownership  of  the  sovereignty  with  which  it  had  become  closely  identified 
by  divorcing  the  landed  nobility  from  government  without,  in  most  cases, 
taking  their  land.  Sovereignty  stripped  from  them,  the  landed  nobility 
were  left  with  the  status  of  private  persons  owning  land.  This  was 
perhaps  the  single  most  significant  development  preparing  the  way  for 
the  full  industrial  revolution  and  the  modern  era.  The  loosening  of  land 
ownership  from  the  rules  of  primogeniture  rapidly  followed,  so  that  land 
could  be  bought  and  sold  exactly  as  other  kinds  of  property.  Throughout 
Europe,  one  of  the  outstanding  achievements  of  the  eighteenth  century 
was  free  trade  in  land.  The  same  pattern  followed  in  the  New  World 
where,  with  the  extension  of  franchise  and  the  democratization  of 
government,  landowners  as  such  found  themselves  divorced  from  the 
sovereignty  and  the  tax  power  and  dependent  on  administering  their 
land  in  the  market  for  their  sole  revenues. 

Such  were  the  antecedents  of  modern  real  estate.  In  the  rising  demand 
for  land  that  accompanied  the  industrial  revolution,  land  was  bought  and 
sold  speculatively,  and  landlords  collected  what  rents  the  market  offered 
without  understanding  their  role  or  the  reason  why  rents  came  to  them. 
Landowners  themselves  accepted  the  charge  of  John  Stuart  Mill  and 
Henry  George  that  rent  was  "unearned  increment."  Almost  the  sole 
function  of  land  ownership  in  the  nineteenth  century  and  the  first 


Evolving  Society 


101 


decades  of  the  twentieth  was  distributive;  the  market  in  land  afforded, 
through  a  pricing  system,  a  flexible  and  equitable  means  of  allocating 
sites  and  resources  and  thereby  fulfilled  a  prime  functional  requisite  of 
community  life.  Visible  improvements  such  as  roads  and  utilities,  which 
contribute  to  the  value  of  land  served  by  them  and  therefore  account  for 
a  substantial  part  of  such  rents  as  landowners  receive,  were  financed  not 
by  the  landowners  but  by  taxes,  even  though  the  taxes  were  chiefly  levied 
on  land. 

In  the  twentieth  century,  land  owners  have  begun  to  assume  responsi- 
bility for  some  of  the  public  improvements  of  land,  both  in  residential 
subdivisions  intended  to  be  sold  off"  as  individual  lots  and  in  develop- 
ments such  as  shopping  centers  intended  to  remain  under  whole  owner- 
ship. Shopping  centers,  for  example,  are  providing  many  of  the  services 
normally  performed  by  municipal  agencies  in  the  older  retail  districts. 
These  include  parking,  roads,  lighting,  landscaped  common  areas,  police 
and  fire  protection,  storm  sewers,  and  in  some  cases,  sewage  disposal. 

Such  a  development  has  become  increasingly  necessary  as  sovereignty 
has  failed  to  meet  the  advancing  demand.  In  1956  the  Society  of 
Residential  Appraisers  summarized  the  situation: 

In  both  the  United  States  and  Canada,  land  development  has  been  tradition- 
ally a  matter  for  local  governments.  Ground  services  were  installed  under 
municipal  direction  and  financed  either  by  general  levies  on  real  property  or 
by  local  improvement  charges  against  the  specific  properties  benefiting  from 
the  development. .  .  . 

Until  the  postwar  period,  there  was  little  reason  to  disturb  this  arrangement. 
Areas  improved  in  advance  of  need  sufficed  for  most  development  of  the 
1920's.  .  .  .  Therefore,  both  countries  entered  the  postwar  period  with  a  fund 
of  "available  serviced  land,"  and  also  with  the  idea  that  such  a  fund  of  idle 
improved  land  was  normal. 

The  fund  was  quickly  exhausted.  Problems  of  organization  and  finance 
rendered  many  municipaUties  incapable  of  coping  with  the  required  growth. 

Meanwhile,  some  municipalities  have  continued  to  provide  services  in  the 
traditional  way,  but  an  increasing  number  in  both  countries  have  shifted  the 
financing  to  the  subdivider,  to  be  paid  for  in  the  price  of  his  lots  or  houses. 

A  recent  survey  of  the  Urban  Land  Institute  of  U.  S.  cities  of  50,000 
population  and  over  shows  that  two-thirds  of  them  require  the  developer  to 
provide  the  services  in  this  manner. 

Land  owners  are  progressively  assuming  responsibility  for  servicing 
new  land.  As  yet,  the  prevailing  practice  where  sale  of  sites  is  contem- 
plated is  to  dedicate  the  completed  facilities  such  as  streets  and  storm 


102 


The  Art  of  Community 


sewers  to  the  sovereignty  to  maintain,  although  there  is  experimentation 
in  new  subdivisions  with  condominium  organization  whereby  the 
common  facilities  are  maintained  by  an  association  of  surrounding 
owners.  The  trend  over  the  long  term,  however,  is  for  land  owners  not 
only  to  build  improvements  into  land,  but  more  and  more  to  assume 
continuing  responsiblility  for  their  operation  and  maintenance  by 
holding  their  interest  in  the  whole  development  intact. 

The  significance  of  these  developments  for  the  long  term  is  that  they 
seem  to  herald,  on  some  perhaps-not-so-distant  horizon,  the  end  of  the 
period  of  sovereignty— that  unstable  transition  between  the  broad 
kinship-based  level  of  social  organization  and  the  next  plateau  of  social 
integration  in  terms  of  contract.  The  auspicious  beginnings  here  are  the 
growth  of  multiple-occupancy  income  properties— proprietary  communi- 
ties—commencing not  on  a  large  scale  or  conceived  in  ambitious  social 
plans,  but  almost  inconspiciously  in  countless  small  beginnings:  shop- 
ping centers,  industrial  estates,  apartments,  mobile-home  communities, 
and  real-estate  complexes  on  the  order  of  Rockefeller  and  Prudential 
Centers  and  Century  City.  The  potential  in  these  small  beginnings  is  that 
they  will  grow,  not  only  in  numbers  but  also  as  seed  crystals,  as 
Rockefeller  Center  has  grown,  expanding  to  include  adjacent  sites  by 
purchase  or  by  offer  of  participation  as  the  land  administration  becomes 
sufficiently  productive  to  j ustif y  it. 

A  novel  proposal  for  a  private  approach  to  urban  redevelopment 
might  also  one  day  prove  its  worth  and  augment  these  beginnings. 
Architect  Arthur  C.  Holden  of  New  York  suggested  in  the  1930's  that 
instead  of  outside  interests  assembling  blighted  properties  in  downtown 
areas  by  purchase,  which  requires  almost  prohibitive  amounts  of  capital 
when  it  can  be  done  at  all,  the  existing  multiple  land  owners  within  an 
area  might  form  an  owning  and  managing  corporation  for  that  area  and 
pool  their  separate  titles  at  appraised  values  in  exchange  for  equivalent 
undivided  shares  in  the  whole.  The  resulting  corporation  would  find  itself 
owning  an  extremely  valuable  piece  of  property  which  could  be  pledged 
to  secure  funds  for  its  redevelopment.  With  financing  available  from 
conventional  sources,  no  money  investment  would  be  required  of  the 
owners,  nor  any  expenditure  of  taxes  by  the  public,  for  the  replanning 
and  redevelopment  of  the  assembled  area.  Because  the  value  of  the 
assembled  property  would  exceed  the  sum  value  of  the  parts  before 
pooling  (being  now  of  an  economic  size  for  redevelopment),  each 
owner's  equity  would  be  correspondingly  greater.  In  addition,  it  would  be 
more  liquid.  Each  would  have  traded  an  uncertain  interest  in  a  blighted 
area  for  a  secure  share  in  a  productive  enterprise. 


Evolving  Society 


103 


Mr.  Holden  wrote  in  his  proposal: 

In  September,  1666,  when  the  great  fire  of  London  laid  the  heart  of  that  city 
in  ashes.  Sir  Christopher  Wren  offered  a  plan  that  might  have  made  London 
City  the  most  efficient  municipality  of  the  modern  world.  His  plan  was  not 
carried  out,  partly  because  it  was  said  that  there  was  no  available  fund  large 
enough  to  finance  the  work,  but  principally  because  the  merchants  who  had 
suffered  the  loss  quite  naturally  insisted  that  their  homes  and  places  of 
business  should  be  re-erected  as  quickly  as  possible  upon  the  sites  over  which 
they  controlled  the  rights. 

Almost  the  same  story  followed  most  of  the  conflagrations  that  have 
destri^ved  the  physical  hearts  of  many  modern  cities. .  .  . 

No  one  disputes  the  desirability  of  a  planned  physical  re-building.  Men  have 
failed,  however,  to  visualize  the  rebuilding  of  existing  complicated  contrac- 
tual relationships.  The  merchants  of  London  thought  they  had  no  funds  to 
draw  on  because  they  looked  in  the  wrong  direction.  The  resources  needed 
for  reconstruction  can  be  commanded  only  by  the  expected  earning  power  of 
the  redeveloped  areas.  Credit  is  based  upon  belief  in  the  future,  upon 
reasonable  assumptions  as  to  possible  accomplishment,  upon  the  vision  and 
integrity  of  men  who  look  to  the  future  and  plan  for  the  future. 

Each  successful  multiple-occupancy  income  property  in  real  estate, 
beside  comprising  a  community,  is  a  growing  island  of  profitable 
proprietary  administration,  a  point  of  health  in  the  world  social  fabric. 
As  these  small  beginnings,  growing  in  number  and  in  size,  approach  one 
another,  they  will  tend  increasingly  to  merge  their  interests  whenever  the 
prospect  of  economy  in  administration  or  improved  service  for  the 
tenants  makes  it  advantageous  for  all  concerned  to  do  so.  They  will  not 
be  hindered,  as  were  primitive  proprietary  communities,  by  lack  of  ways 
to  reconcile  their  ownerships.  The  primitive  world  not  only  lacked  such 
flexible  means  of  adjustment  as  are  afforded  by  modern  appraisal 
techniques,  venture  vehicles,  and  securities  markets,  but  merger  might 
have  been  even  less  feasible  in  the  Sumerian  instance  because  of  the 
identification  of  the  landed  interest  in  each  place  with  its  exclusive 
religious  institution  and  tutelary  god. 

A  main  theme  of  this  book  has  been  that  the  period  of  sovereignty  is 
but  the  unstable  transition  between  two  levels  of  human  social  organiza- 
tion—the kinship  level  and  the  contractual.  On  both  levels,  the  structure 
and  organization  are  proprietary. 

Property  in  land  was  first  institutionalized  in  the  kinship  organization 
of  the  hunting  and  food-gathering  band,  which  recognized  as  spokesman 
for  the  group  a  senior  member.  It  was  he  who  performed  the  land 
distributive  function  so  far  as  there  was  need.  Thus  did  property  in  land 


104 


The  Art  of  Community 


evolve,  in  the  idiom  of  kinship,  within  small  population  groups  or  sub- 
groups with  relatively  stable  membership. 

As  technology  and  environmental  conditions  in  some  places  permitted 
larger  and  impersonal  aggregations  of  population,  the  recognition  of 
property  in  land  came  to  be  practiced  beyond  the  range  of  kinship  ties 
and  obligations.  This  impersonalization  of  land  marked  the  manorial 
community,  the  first  emergence  of  a  contractual  form  of  proprietary 
community  in  a  world  still  largely  ordered  in  kinship  terms.  This  was  a 
significant  event,  but  it  would  be  long  before  conditions  would  be  such 
that  it  could  come  into  its  own.  In  the  modern  world,  the  signs  are  just 
beginning. 

Numerous  examples  surviving  in  the  world  today  illustrate  manorial 
institutions.  One  instance  are  the  Mambwe  people  of  Northen  Rhodesia, 
of  whom  anthropologist  William  Watson  writes: 

The  chief  nominally  "owns"  all  the  land  in  his  chieftaincy,  and  in  return  for 
giving  it  to  his  subjects  to  cultivate,  they  return  him  obedience  and  respect.  In 
Gluckman's  terms,  these  subjects  have  "estates  of  holding."  The  chief  grants 
rights  to  each  village  headman,  who  in  turn  grants  his  villagers  rights  in 
village  land.  Each  person  granted  such  rights  in  the  hierarchy  has  duties  and 
obligations  of  a  similar  kind  to  the  holder  from  whom  he  obtained  his 
particular  rights  to  the  use  of  the  land.  A  Mambwe  who  is  dissatisfied  with  the 
rule  of  one  chief  is  at  liberty  to  move  to  another  chieftaincy,  and  provided  he 
can  find  a  headman  who  will  take  him  into  his  village,  wiH  be  granted  rights 
to  the  use  of  land  by  the  chief  and  headman  in  return  for  obedience  and 
recognition.  These  rules  apply  to  strangers,  who  are  welcomed  and  encou- 
raged to  settle  on  the  land. .  .  . 

.  .  .  the  commoners  must  be  treated  with  care  and  their  interests  consulted,  or 
the  headman  will  lose  them  to  a  more  just  and  generous  title-holder.  The 
commoners  depend  on  a  title-holder  for  rights  to  cultivate  land,  for  justice 
and  for  the  performance  of  rituals  upon  which  depend  the  fertility  of  both 
land  and  people.  The  personality  of  a  headman  is  therefore  an  important 
factor  in  determining  the  size  and  prosperity  of  a  village,  for  if  he  cannot 
satisfy  his  villagers,  they  will  leave  him  and  go  elsewhere.*  He  must  be 
circumspect  and  tactful  in  all  his  dealings. ' 

A  strength  of  both  kinds  of  early  community,  kinship  and  manorial, 
was  their  unitary  land  authority.  But  the  primitive  world  was  host  to 
many  communities,  each  constituting  a  separate  division  of  such  author- 
ity. In  the  course  of  time,  owing  to  the  general  increase  in  population 
after  the  rise  of  agriculture  and  to  the  uneven  distribution  of  arable  land 

*A  native  African  expression  describes  the  chief  who  has  so  far  mismanaged  his  village  as 
to  lose  all  his  villagers.  It  is  said  that  such  a  chief  is  left  alone  in  his  village  to  be  "Chief  of  the 
Pumpkins." 


Evolving  Society 


105 


in  the  world,  it  was  not  unlikely  that  a  number  of  communities  would 
grow  up  in  close  proximity  and  their  combined  area  take  on  the  aspect  of 
a  larger  or  composite  community  with  fragmented  land  interests. 
Confronted  by  a  common  circumstance  requiring  them  to  coordinate 
some  aspect  of  their  behavior,  and  depending  on  the  severity  of  that 
circumstance,  the  several  communities  would  face  a  crisis  of  administra- 
tion. The  primitive  institution  of  property  was  little  developed  to  cope 
with  this  difficult  situation. 

Within  each  successive  rise  of  civilization,  as  the  growth  of  population 
and  specialization  brought  increasing  interdependence  of  land  uses,  the 
lack  of  any  plan  or  coordination  gradually  became  critical.  The  mount- 
ing crises  led  to  apathy  or  else  provoked  ever  greater  efforts  to  resolve 
them.  Sovereignty,  the  power  of  expropriation,  seemed  the  only  recourse; 
but  it  was,  at  best,  palliative.  As  it  relieved  the  symptoms  to  prolong  the 
life  of  the  community,  the  points  of  conflict  multiplied.  Thus  was 
sovereignty  stimulated  until  its  activity  exceeded  the  ability  of  the 
productive  community  to  sustain  it.  Yet,  paradoxically,  the  community 
supported  the  sovereignty  in  order  to  continue  to  live.  So  progress 
brought  its  own  decline,  and  the  administration  of  cities  and  states 
lapsed  in  disorder  and  default. 

While  contemporary  civilization  hitherto  has  traced  the  same  tiresome 
and  tragic  course,  the  future  is  by  no  means  as  certain.  Experience  gained 
in  the  commercial/industrial  revolution  in  handling  property  of  many 
kinds  has  provided  institutions  for  a  similarly  productive  administration 
of  property  in  land.  A  new  social  capability,  an  authentic  art  of 
community,  already  has  emerged  in  tens  of  thousands  of  small  begin- 
nings. Its  successes  are  attracting  both  the  capital  and  the  organizational 
resources  of  the  developed  industrial  sector  of  the  economy.  Might  not 
these  beginnings  contain  the  empirical  seed  of  a  new  social  integration 
which  will  ultimately  permit  men  to  be  truly  creative  in  their  community 
affairs  as  they  have  begun  to  be  in  their  material  world,  therein 
producing  new  environments  appropriate  to  the  infinite  process  of 
differentiation— and,  with  this,  the  ever  increasing  potential  for  fulfilling 
association— of  the  individual  human  spirit? 


References 


Chapter  1 

Is  the  Hotel  a  Community? 

1 .  George  A.  Hillery,  "Definition  of  Community— Areas  of  Agreement,"  Rural 
Sociology,  June  1955,  p.  111. 

2.  Conrad  Arensberg,  "The  Community  Study  Method,"  The  American  Journal 
of  Sociology,  September  1954,  p.  124. 

3.  A.  R.  Radclilfe-Brown,  A  Natural  Science  of  Society  (Glencoe,  111.:  Free 
Press,  1957),  p.  114. 

Chapter  2, 
Historical  Briefs 

1.  Ursula  B.  Stone,  "Hotels,"  Encyclopedia  of  the  Social  Sciences  (New  York: 
Macmillan  Co.,  1932)  VII,  p.  473. 

2.  Jefferson  Williamson,  The  American  Hotel:  An  Anecdotal  History  (New 
York:  Alfred  A.  Knopf,  1930),  p.  125. 

3.  Victor  Gruen,  "Twelve  Check  Points  for  Regional  Planned  Center," 
Women's  Wear  Daily,  28  December  1953,  p.  35. 

4.  Leon  W.  Ellwood  and  Robert  H.  Armstrong,  "Shops,  Stores  and  Shopping 
Centers,  Part  4,"  Appraisal  Journal,  October  1952,  p.  475. 

5.  Architectural  Forum,  August  1950,  p.  107. 

6.  Richard  L.  Nelson,  The  Selection  of  Retail  Locations  (New  York:  F.  W. 
Dodge,  1958),  p.  276. 

7.  Stores,  January  1958,  p.  15. 

8.  J.  Ross  McKeever,  "Shopping  Centers  Restudied,"  Urban  Land  Institute 
Technical  Bulletin  No.  50  (1957),  p.  69. 

9.  "The  Planned  Industrial  District,  A  Symposium,"  Architectural  Forum,  April 
1954,  p.  110. 

10.  Theodore  K.  Pasma,  Organized  Industrial  Districts— A  Tool  for  Community 
Development  (Washington,  D.C.:  Government  Printing  Office,  1954),  p.  1. 

11.  Gilbert  J.  Hardman,  "The  Industrial  Estate  and  the  Community,"  News 
Bulletin  of  the  Institute  of  Public  Administration  of  Canada,  August  1957,  p. 
27 

12.  W.  N.  Mitchell  and  M.  J.  Jucius,  "Industrial  Districts  of  the  Chicago  Region 
and  Their  Influence  on  Plant  Location,"  Journal  of  Business,  April  1933,  p. 
140. 

13.  Hardman,  loc.  cit. 


108 


The  Art  of  Community 


14.  Richard  L.  Nelson  and  Frederick  T.  Aschman,  Real  Estate  and  City 
Planning  {Englewood  Cliffs,  N.J.:  Prentice  Hall,  1957),  p.  356. 

15.  James  R.  Lee  and  Gilbert  K.  H.  Wong,  An  Analysis  of  Organized  Industrial 
Districts  (Menlo  Park,  Calif.:  Stanford  Research  Institute,  1958),  p.  24. 

16.  Richard  T.  Murphy  and  William  L.  Baldwin,  "Business  Moves  to  the 
Industrial  Park,"  Harvard  Business  Review,  May  1959,  p.  79. 

17.  A.  W.  Krebs,  Jr.,  "Trends  in  Industrial  Parks,"  Industrial  Development,  June 

1959,  p.  45. 

18.  Richard  U.  Ratcliff,  Urban  Land  Economics  (New  York:  McGraw-Hill, 
1949),  p.  415. 

19.  Pasma,  Op.  Cit.,  p.  62. 

20.  N.  C.  Hudson,  "Chicago's  Clearing  Industrial  District  Pioneers  Principle  of 
Industrial  Zoning,"  Traffic  World,  5  August  1950,  p.  58. 

21.  Richard  M.  Hallet,  Jr.,  "New  Lure  for  Districts,"  Industrial  Development, 
February  1959,  pp.  11,  14. 

22.  Murphy  and  Baldwin,  op.  cit.,  p.  88. 

23.  Douglas  P.  Wells,  Vice  President,  as  quoted  by  N.  C.  Hudson,  loc.  cit. 

24.  George  W.  Cox,  "The  Role  of  Railroads  in  Industrial  District  Develop- 
ment," Urban  Land,  February  1958,  p.  2. 

25.  Adapted  from  Robert  E.  Boley,  "Industrial  Districts  Restudied,"  Urban 
Land  Institute  Technical  Bulletin  No.  41  (1961),  Table  1,  p.  30,  and 
David  A.  Smith,  "An  Analysis  of  American  Industrial  Parks"  (Master's 
Thesis,  Clark  University,  1968),  Table  3,  p.  22. 

26.  Zenon  S.  Malinowski  and  William  N.  Kinnard,  The  Flace  of  Small  Business 
in  Planned  Industrial  Districts  (Storrs,  Conn.:  University  of  Connecticut, 
1963),  p.  108. 

27.  American  Society  of  Planning  Officials,  Information  Report  No.  84,  March 
1956,  p.  4. 

28.  For  an  excellent  historical  review,  see  Frederick  H.  Bair,  Jr.,  Mobile  Homes 
and  the  General  Housing  Supply;  Past,  Present  and  Outlook  (Chicago: 
Mobile  Homes  Manufacturers'  Association,  1969). 

29.  Ethel  Kienz,  "Choosing  a  Mobile  Home  Park,"  Consumer  Bulletin,  March 
1969,  pp.  21-23. 

30.  H.  L.  Banholomew,  "Operating  a  Trailer  Park,"  Urban  Land,  December 

1960,  pp.  5-6. 

31.  The  Mobile  Homes  Manufacturers'  Association  in  1968  counted  22,000 
sanitary  district  permits  for  mobile  home  parks  nationwide.  However,  this 
figure  is  known  to  contain  many  uses  which  are  not  properly  parks. Woodall's 
Directory  of  Mobile  Home  Parks  in  1962  contained  16,179  listings. 

32.  H.  A.  Bruno  &  Associates,  Inc.,  FactSheet~59th  National  Boat  Show  (New 
York),  January  1969. 

33.  Boley,  op.  cit.,  p.  18. 

34.  Dorothy  Thompson,  "A  New  Look  for  Commercialism,"  Architectural 
Forum,  November  1954,  p.  156.  Excerpted  from  her  regular  column  in 
Ladies'  Home  Journal,  June  1954,  p.  11. 


References 


109 


Chapter  3 

Trends  in  the  Real  Estate  Industry 

1.  Marc  J.  Feldstein  and  Lyle  C.  Bryant,  "Organization  of  Occupancy  as  an 
Approach  to  Real  Estate  Management,"  Journal  of  Land  and  Public  Utility 
Economics,  November  1941,  p.  461. 

2.  Stanley  L.  McMichael,  How  to  Operate  a  Real  Estate  Business  (Englewood 
Cliffs,  N.J.:  Prentice-Hall,  1947),  p.  4. 

3.  Garnett  Laidlaw  Eskew,  Of  Land  and  Men  (Washington,  D.C.:  Urban  Land 
Institute,  1959),  p.  10. 

4.  "The  Planned  Industrial  District,  A  Symposium,"  Architectural  Forum,  April 
1954,  p.  110. 

5.  National  Association  of  Home  Builders,  Land  Planning  Committee,  Home 
Builders'  Manual  for  Land  Development  (Washington,  D.C.:  National 
Assocation  of  Home  Builders,  1958),  pp.  234-248. 

6.  "The  Planned  Industrial  District,"  loc.  cit. 

7.  Frederick  M.  Babcock,  The  Valuation  of  Real  Estate  (New  York:  McGraw- 
Hill,  1932),  p.  129. 

8.  E.  F.  Hutton  and  Company,  Market  and  Business  Survey,  November  1960, 
p.  2. 

9.  Ratcliff,  loc.  cit. 

10.  "Exchange  Park  at  Dallas  Is  a  City  Within  a  City,"  Manufacturers'  Record, 
December  1956,  p.  9. 

11.  International  Council  of  Shopping  Centers,  Fact  Sheet,  1  May  1969. 

12.  James  C.  Downs,  "The  Meaning  of  Management  Today,"  Journal  of 
Property  Management,  September  1953,  p.  36.  This  journal  is  published  by 
the  Institute  of  Real  Estate  Management  of  the  National  Association  of 
Real  Estate  Boards,  Chicago,  Illinois. 

13.  Edgardo  Contini  at  the  Aspen  Design  Conference,  as  reported  in  Victor 
Gruen  and  Larry  Smith,  Shopping  Towns  USA  (New  York:  Reinhold, 
1960),  p.  271. 


Chapter  5 

Structure  and  Function 

1.  Adam  Smith,  The  Wealth  of  Nations,  Part  1  (New  York:  P.  F.  Collier  and 
Son,  1901),  p.  369. 

2.  Nelson  and  Aschman,  op.  cit.,  p.  381. 

3.  Benjamin  Swig,  "How  the  Picture  has  Changed  for  Real  Estate  as  an 
Investment,"  Journal  of  Property  Management,  December  1958,  p.  69. 

4.  Harold  C.  Narrow,  "In  the  Ring:  Center  vs.  Center,"  Journal  of  Property 
Management,  June  1959,  p.  235. 


110 


The  Art  of  Community 


5.  Richmond,  California,  City  Planning  Commission,  Commercial  Development 
in  Richmond,  16  January  1958. 

6.  Ratcliff,  op.  cit.,  p.  6. 

7.  Ibid.,  p.  2S3. 

8.  "$27-million  'Empire  Central'  Set  by  Windsor  Properties,"  Manufacturers' 
Record,  January  1958,  p.  10. 

9.  Ernest  B.  Horwath  and  Louis  Toth,  Hotel  Accounting  (New  York:  Ronald 
Printing  Company,  1948),  p.  4. 

10.  James  C.  Downs,  Jr.,  Principles  of  Real  Estate  Management  (Chicago: 
Institute  of  Real  Estate  Management,  1964),  p.  300. 

Chapter  6 

Comparisons  With  Primitive  Community 

1.  Melville  J.  Herskovits,  Economic  Anthropology:  A  Study  in  Comparative 
Economics  (New  York:  Knopf,  1952),  p.  369.  For  a  thoughtful  and 
informative  book  on  land  tenure  worldwide,  see  Vincent  Liversage,  Land 
Tenure  in  the  Colonies  (London:  Cambridge  University  Press,  1945). 

2.  For  a  rare  ethnographic  description  of  a  concerted  program  of  community 
planning  at  the  village  community  level,  see  I.  Schapera,  "The  Social 
Structure  of  the  Tswana  Ward,"  Bantu  Studies,  September  1935,  p.  111. 

3.  Bernard  Gallin,  "A  case  for  Intervention  in  the  Field,"  Human  Organization, 
Fall  1959,  p.  141. 

4.  PhiUp  Drucker,  Indians  of  the  Northwest  Coast  (New  York:  McGraw-Hill, 
1955),  p.  116. 

5.  For  a  functional  interpretation  of  the  potlatch,  see  Spencer  H.  MacCallum, 
Art  of  the  Northwest  Coast  (Princeton:  The  Art  Museum,  Princeton 
University,  1969),  pp.  10-11. 

6.  See  Raymond  Firth,  Primitive  Polynesian  Economy  (London:  Routledge  & 
Sons,  1939),  p.  222. 

Chapter  7 

The  Nature  of  Community  Organization 

1.  Spencer  Heath,  Citadel,  Market  and  Altar  (Baltimore:  Science  of  Society 
Foundation,  1957),  p.  235. 

2.  National  Association  of  Home  Builders,  op.  cit.,  p.  22. 

3.  See,  for  example,  James  C.  Downs,  Jr.,  op.  cit.,  pp.  217-220. 

4.  V.  Gordon  Childe,  The  Prehistory  of  European  Society  (Harmondsworth, 
Middlesex:  Penguin  Books,  1958).  See  page  84  and  elsewhere,  especially 
Chapter  6,  "The  Urban  Revolution  in  the  Orient." 

5.  James  W.  Rouse,  "Will  Downtown  Pace  Up  to  Its  Future?"  Urban 
Land,  February  1957,  p.  4. 


References 


111 


Chapter  8 
Evolving  Society 

1.  Sir  Henry  Maine,  Ancient  Law  (London:  Dent  and  Sons,  1917),  p.  100. 

2.  Sol  Tax,  Penny  Capitalism:  A  Guatemalan  Indian  Economy  (Washington, 
D.C.:  Smithsonian  Institution,  Institute  of  Social  Anthropology,  1953). 

3.  Arnold  J.  Toynbee,  A  Study  of  History  (Oxford:  Oxford  University  Press, 
1934),  II,  pp.  88,  97.  See  also  B.  S.  Phillpotts,  Kindred  and  Clan  (Cam- 
bridge: University  Press,  1913),  p.  265. 

4.  Karl  A.  Wittfogel,  Oriental  Despotism  (New  Haven:  Yale  University  Press, 
1957). 

5.  Robert  W.  Adams,  "The  Origin  of  Cities,"  Scientific  American,  September 
1960. 

6.  Frederick  O.  Gearing,  Priests  and  Warriors;  Social  Structures  for  Cherokee 
Politics  in  the  18th  Century  (Menasha,  Wise:  American  Anthropological 
Assocation,  Memoir  93,  1962). 

7.  Society  of  Residential  Appraisers,  "Land  Development  in  Expanding 
Municipalities,"  The  Review,  August  1956,  p.  19. 

8.  Arthur  C.  Holden.  "Technique  for  Urban  Redevelopment,  Part  II:  Combina- 
tion and  Large-Scale  Initiative  in  Real  Estate,"  Journal  of  Land  and  Public 
Utility  Economics,  August  1944,  p.  238.  For  his  detailed  proposal,  see 
"Group  Action,"  Land  Usage  (Publication  of  the  Land  Utilization  Commit- 
tee of  the  New  York  Building  Congress),  April-May  1936. 

9.  William  Watson,  Tribal  Cohesion  in  a  Money  Economy:  A  Study  of  the 
Mambwe  People  of  Northern  Rhodesia  (Manchester:  Manchester  University 
Press,  1958),  pp.  19,  90.  This  volume  was  published  on  behalf  of  the 
Rhodes-Livingstone  Institute. 


I 


Index 


Addison  Industrial  District,  24 
Africa,  99,  104 
Airlawn  Industrial  Park,  22 
Airplane,  4,  51,  53 
Alfredian  Renaissance,  99 
Allen,  James  B.,  36 
Anglo-Saxons,  99 

Annacis  Island  Industrial  Estate,  25 
Anthropology,  1,  3,  4,  5  {See  also 
Social  science) 

bridge  to,  3 
Apartment  building,  4,  44,  52 
Appraisal,  45 
Arensberg,  Conrad,  3 
Art  of  community,  1,  66,  105 
Aschman,  Frederick  T.,  56 
Asia,  71,  99 
Associations,  66,  80-81 

tenants',  17-18,  66 

home  owners',  24,  31 
Austin,  John,  86 
Authority,  88-89 
Avoidance  relations,  5 


Babcock,  Frederick  M.,  45 
Baldwin,  William  L.,  23,  26 
Bergen  County  Industrial  Terminal, 
25 

Boating,  34 

Bouton,  Edward  H.,  15,  41,  42,  44 
Buffalo  Stader  Hotel,  1 1 
Bryant,  Lyle  C,  39 
Bus,  51 

Bush  Terminal,  21 


California  City,  47 

Campground  and  trailering  park,  4, 

29,  33 
Canada,  34,  47,  101 
Capital,  organization  of,  47,  79 
Card  playing,  77 
Celibacy,  80 

Central  business  district,  56-59,  84-85 


Central  Manufacturing  District,  21 

Century  City,  47,  102 

Cheating,  77 

Cherokee,  98,  99 

Chieftain  (See  Village  headman) 

Childe,  V.  Gordon,  89 

China,  8,  99 

Cities,  1,  32,  49,  52,  56-59,  84-85,  91 

(See  also  Subdivision) 
City  Hotel,  9 

Civilization  (See  Western  civiliza- 
tion) 

Clearing  Industrial  District,  21,  26, 
27 

Commercialism,  36 
Commune,  3,  120 

Community  (See  also  Proprietary 
community) 

administrative  checks,  91-92 

art  of,  1,  66,  105 

as  unit  of  social  science,  3 

bases  of  organization,  2,  75 

classes  of,  49-53 

condominium,  49,  52,  83 

continuum  of  types,  79-84 

cooperative,  73,  80,  83 

defective  models,  1 

defined, 3-4 

examples: 

airplane,  4,  51,  53 
apartment  house,  4,  44,  52 
bus,  5 1 

city,  1,  32,  49,  52,  56-59,  84-85, 

91  (i'ee  a/i'o  Subdivision) 
company  town,  36 
factory,  50,  52 
home,  4,  51,  52 
hotel,  2-5,  7-14,  17,  51,  52 
industrial  estate,  21-28,  52 
loft  building,  7,  45 
marina,  33-34 
mart  building,  7 
medical  clinic,  33 
mobile  home  park,  28-33 
motel,  13-14,  30 


114 


The  Art  of  Community 


'new  towns,'  34,  46-47,  52 
office  building  or  center,  4,  33, 
45,  51 

real  estate  complex,  33,  46,  52 
religious  commune,  2,  80 
restaurant,  4,  52,  53 
science  research  center,  33 
ship,  4,  53 

shopping  center,  15-20,  47,  51, 

52 
store,  52 
theater,  4,  51-53 

trailering  park,  campground,  4, 

29,  33 
train.  4,  13,  51,  53 
village  community,  52,  53,  69- 
74,  96  {See  also  Cooperative) 

functional  requirements  of,  3,  63- 
67,  70-71,  95 

health  of,  46,  50,  67 

intermittent,  5 1-53 

non-rental,  49-50 

pathology  of,  75,  95 

role  of  owner,  63-67  {See  also  Ten- 
ant selection.  Land  planning. 
Leadership,  village  commu- 
nity) 

subdivided,  24,  31-32,  49,  52,  55- 
59,  78-79,  83,  86-87,  91 

subsidized,  10-1 1,  20.  27-28,  35-36, 
49-50,  53 

variables,  4 

within  communities,  4 
Company  town,  36 
Competition,  16,  26 
Condominium,  49,  52,  83 
Conejo  Valley,  47 
Constitutions,  91-92 
Contract,  4-5,  75,  77,  92-93,  95 
Cooperative,  73,  80,  83 
Corporation,  93 
Country  Club  Plaza,  15,  41 
Covenants  {See  Land  use  controls) 
Creativity,  28 
Crisis,  57,  105 


Demsetz,  Harold,  76 
Don  Mills,  34,  47 


Douglas,  James  B.,  17 
Downs,  James  C.  Jr.,  47,  65 
Downtown,  56-59,  84-85,  91 
Durkheim,  Emile,  50 


Elk  Grove  Village,  34 
Empire  Central,  47,  64 
England,  9,  12,  21,  99,  103 
Environment,  79  {See  also  Real  es- 
tate industry:  object  of) 
manufacture  of,  48,  50,  72 
relation  to  site  value,  56,  63-64,  72, 
78 

Evolution,  32 
societal,  93,  95-105 
levels  of,  93,  102,  103 
Exchange  Park,  46-47 
Exile,  70 


Factory,  50,  52 

Federal  Housing  Administration,  16, 
83 

Feldstein,  Marc  J..  39 
Firth,  Raymond,  70 
Flexibility,  32,  36,  50,  59,  84-85 

in  land  use,  22-24,  32,  87 
Force,  75,  77,  89 

nature  of,  85-86 
Ford,  Henry,  1 1 
France,  8 


Gallin,  Bernard,  71 

Gearing,  Frederick  O.,  99 

George,  Henry,  100 

Gift,  72,  96 

Gluckman,  Max,  104 

Government,  effects  of,  16,  21,  30, 
40,  71,  83,  99  {See  also  Sover- 
eignty) 

Gruen,  Victor,  15 


Hardman,  Gilbert  J.,  23,  43 
Harmon,  William  E.,  40 
Headman  {See  Village  headman) 
Heath,  Spencer,  76 


Index 


115 


Herskovitz,  Melville,  69 

Highland  Park  Shopping  Village,  15 

Hillery,  George  3 

Holden,  Arthur  Cort,  102 

Home,  4,  51,  52 

ownership,  32,  44 
Hopi,  72 

Horwath,  Ernest,  65 

Hotel  (See  also  Inns,  Motels) 

as  community,  2-5,  51,  52 

history,  7-14 

service,  8-10,  17 
Hsin  Hsing,  71 
Hudson,  J.  L.  Company,  36 
Hutton,  E.  F.  and  Company,  45 


Incentive,  72-74,  90 
India,  99 
Individual,  105 
Industrial  estate,  21-28,  52 
Industrial  park,  22  (See  also  Indus- 
trial estate) 
Industrial  revolution,  47,  96,  100,  105 
Industry  City,  2 1 
Inn,  7-10,  12-14 
Innovation,  28 
Irrigation,  97-98 
Irvine  Ranch,  47 


Janns  Brothers,  15 
Japan, 99 
Jesus,  75 
Jucius,  M.  J.,  22 


Kingship,  98 
Kinnard,  William  N.,  28 
Kmship.  75,  92-94,  96,  103-104 
Kitimat,  47 


Laguna  Niguel,  34,  47 
Land  (See  also  Leasehold,  Real  es- 
tate industry.  Subdivision) 
as  capital,  47,  79 

conflict  of  interests,  55-57,  116- 
117.  86-87 


controls.  42-44 
associations.  24 
covenants.  23-24.  42-43 
leasehold.  23.  43-44 
performance  standards,  23 
tenant  selection,  23  (See  also 

Land  planning) 
zonmg,  30,  42-43,  71 

free  trade  in  eighteenth  century, 
100 

interest  of  landowners,  55 
planning,  15,  22.  25-26.  35-36,  37, 

57,  63-65,  71 
redevelopment,  32.  91.  102-103 
reform,  71 

specializations  of  use,  79,  86 

speculation,  32,  39,  40 

value,  15,  23,  41,  42,  45.  56-58,  63- 
64,  78  (See  also  Land  plan- 
ning. Land  controls) 
Leadership.  17-18.  20.  57,  59,  63,  66, 
71 

Leasehold.  23,  24,  26,  28,  32,  43-44, 
47 

Lee,  James,  23 
Loft  building,  7.  45 
London.  9.  12,  103 
Lorillard,  Squire,  41 


Maine,  Sir  Henry  Sumner,  95 
Malinowski,  Zenon  S.,  28 
Mambwe,  104 

Management  (See  Property  manage- 
ment) 
Manhattan,  58 
Manorialism,  96,  104 
Marina,  33-34 
Market,  59ff".  96 
McMichael,  Stanley.  40 
Medical  clinic,  33 
Mesopotamia,  97-98.  103 
Military.  97 
Mill,  John  Stuart,  100 
Mitchell,  W.  N.,  22 
Mobile  home,  28-29,  33 
Mobile  home  park,  28-33 
Modular  housing,  29,  30,  44 
Money,  62 


116 


The  Art  of  Community 


Montgomery  Ward,  16 
Morality,  86 
Motel,  13-14,  30 
Mowbray,  John,  42 
Murphy,  Richard,  23,  26 


Nelson,  Richard  L.,  17,  56 
New  England,  9 
"New  towns,"  34,  46-47,  52 
Nichols,  Jesse  Clyde,  15,  41 
Noah's  Ark  Principle,  17 
Nobility,  100 
Northgate,  16-17 

North  Kansas  City  Industrial  Dis- 
trict, 2 1 
Northland,  16,  36-37 
Northwest  Coast,  71 


Office  building,  4,  45,  51 
Office  center,  33 

Ownership,  44,  47,  69.  76,  85  (See 
also  Contract,  Property,  Prop- 
erty in  land) 


Pathology,  social,  50,  83 
Penn  Central  Railroad,  27 
Police,  66 

Pollution  control,  joint  economies  in, 
27 

Polo,  Marco,  8 

Polynesia.  72 

Potter,  Hugh.  15,  41 

Prather,  Hugh,  15,  41 

Prehistory,  95-98 

Primogeniture,  100 

Profit  motive,  27-28.  35-37.  72  [See 
also  Subsidy) 

Progress,  47,  96  (See  also  Industrial 
revolution.  Profit  motive) 

Property  (See  also  Kinship,  Con- 
tract) 
defined,  60,  76 

observed  by  early  man,  95-96 
principle  of,  76 

systematic  infringements  of,  86 


Property  in  land  (See  also  Land  and 
related  headings) 

function,  84,  100-101 

nature  of,  78-79 

origin,  95-96,  103-104 
Property  management,  7,  19,  30-31, 
35-36,  39,  45-46,  47-48 

in  the  primitive  world,  69ff 
Proprietary  community,  5,  55 

administration  contrasted  with  so- 
vereignty, 88-90 

bridge  between  sociology,  anthro- 
pology, 3 

classification,  7,  49-53 

comparison  of  primitive  with  mod- 
ern forms,  69-74 

continuum  to  fully  developed,  81- 
84 

economy  of,  59-62 

generalized,  49,  53  (See  also  "New 
towns,"  Real  estate  com- 
plexes) 

health  of,  46,  50.  67 

role  of  owner,  63-67.  71  (See  also 
Tenant  selection.  Land  plan- 
ning. Leadership) 

self  regulation.  91-92 

self-sustaining,  50 

society  in  microcosm,  59 

speciahzed,  7,  53 

structure  and  function,  52-67 

trends,  7,  35,  46 
Prudential  Center,  47,  102 
Pumpkins,  Chief  of  the,  104 


Radcliffe-Brown,  A.  R.,  4 
Ratclitfe,  Richard  U.,  24,  46,  60,  64 
Real  estate  complex,  33.  46.  52 
Real  estate  industry,  35-36  (See  also 
Environment,  Land,  Property 
management) 
history,  39-48,  100-101 
land  as  capital,  71,  79 
nature  of,  48 

objective  of,  27,  48,  50,  63,  72 
preconditions  for  modern  growth 
of,  100 


Index 


117 


role  of  property  management,  19 
technological  development  of,  47- 
48 

Religious  commune,  2,  80 
Rent,  62 
contrasted  with  taxes,  89 
functional     correspondence  in 

primitive  society,  72 
management  incentive,  72 
Research  park  {See  Science  research 

center) 
Restaurant,  4,  52,  53 
Retail  trade  statistics,  47,  58 
Revolutions,  92,  100  {See  also  Indus- 
trial revolution) 
Right,  86 

River  Oaks  Shopping  Center,  15,  41 
Riverside,  lUinois,  41 
Rockefeller  Center,  33,  102 
Roland  Park,  15,  41,  42 
Role,  62,  88,  92-93  {See  also  Com- 
munity, role  of  owner) 
Rome,  8,  100 
Roosevelt  Field,  24,  47 
Rouse,  James  W.,  91 

Sacrificial  ethic,  90-91 

Science,  1  {See  also  Social  sciences) 

Science  City,  47 

Science  research  center,  33 

Sears,  Roebuck  and  Company,  16 

Sectional  housing,  29 

Seigniorialism,  69 

Serfdom,  100 

Service,  60 

as  policy,  8-10,  17 
industrial  estate,  25-26,  28 

Ship,  4,  53 

Shoppers'  World,  16 

Shopping  center,  15-20,  47,  51,  52 
compared  with  village  community, 
70fr 

Sixty-Fifth  Street  Industrial  District, 
24 

Slough  Trading  Estate,  21 
Smith,  Adam,  55 
Social  sciences,  2,  4 
anthropology,  1,  3,  4,  5 


failure  of,  1 

new  data,  95 

sociology,  1,  3,  4 

unit  of  analysis  in,  3 
Social  structure,  93 
Southland  Center,  47 
Sovereignty,  32,  75,  79,  83,  85-92,  95, 
105  {See  also  Government, 
Subdivision) 

beginnings  of,  86fr,  97-99 

critical  point  in  development  of,  97 

end  of,  102 

powers  of,  86 

spread  of,  98 

as  a  transition  stage  in  social  evo- 
lution, 103 
Stanford  Industrial  Park,  25 
State,  86ff,  95  {See  also  Government, 

Sovereignty,  Subdivision) 
Stateless  societies,  95 
Statler,  Ellsworth  M.,  11 
Sterling  Forest,  47 
Stevens,  Marshall,  21 
Store,  52 

Subdivision,  24,  31-32,  49,  52,  55-59, 
78-79,  83,  86-87,  91  {See  also 
Sovereignty) 
condominium,  49,  52,  83 
conflict  of  interests,  55-57,  78-79, 

86-87,  91 
effects  of,  24,  31-32,  83,  86 
Subsidy,  10-11,  20,  27-28,  35-36,  49- 

50,  53 
Suburbia,  16 
Sumeria,  97-98,  103 
Sunshine  State  Industrial  Park,  24 


Taxation,  89-90 

alternative  to,  62-63 
Tenant  selection,  18,  23,  25,  63,  65, 

66,  70 
Theater,  4,  51-53 
Thompson,  Dorothy,  36 
Tikopia,  70 
Toth,  Louis,  65 
Toynbee,  Arnold,  96 
Trafford  Park,  2 1 


118 


The  Art  o,  Community 


Trailer,  29 

Trailering  parks  and  campgrounds, 

4,  29,  33 
Train,  4,  13,  51,  53 
Traveler,  8-9,  13 
Tremont  House,  10 
Tribal  chief  {See  Village  headman) 
Tuxedo  Park,  41 


University  City,  47 
Urban  blight,  85 

Urban  Land  Institute,  41,  42,  101 
Urban  renewal  (See  Land  redevel- 
opment) 


Veterans'  Administration,  16 
Village  community,  52,  53,  69-74,  96 
(See  also  Cooperative) 
cooperative  form,  73-74 


Villafe  74,  96,  104 

Voluntet  -on,  79-85 

Wank,  Roland,  21 

Watson,  William,  104 

Western  civilization,  1,  4,  95,  97,  105 
{See  also  Industrial  revolu- 
tion) 
crisis,  105 

industrial  progress,  96 

trend,  47,  95 
Westwood  Village,  15 
Whitman,  Walt,  37 
Williamson,  Jefferson,  1 1 
Windsor,  Bill,  64 
Wittfogel,  Karl,  97 
Wong,  Gilbert,  23 
Woodall's  Publishing  Company,  32 
Wren,  Sir  Christopher,  103 

Zoning,  30,  42-43,  71 


■iilliHMilli 

8048332300 


UEM 

universidad 


FRANCISCO  MARROQUIN 


Este  libro  debe  ser  devuelto 
en  la  ultima  fecha  marcada 


THE  ART  OF  COMMUNITY 

by  Spencer  Heath  MacCallum 

As  both  a  student  and  a  practitioner  of  "the 
proprietary  community  idea,"  Mr.  MacCallum 
has  distilled  in  this  book  his  years  of  research 
and  experience  in  real  estate  development  and 
allied  fields.  His  formal  academic  work  in  art 
and  anthropology,  supplemented  by  independent 
study  in  economics  and  philosophy,  has  produced 
a  sophisticated  perspective  that  challenges  many 
traditional  assumptions  about  viable  societal 
arrangements. 

The  author  begins  with  a  discussion  of  the 
modern  hotel  as  a  prototype  of  an  ideally  func- 
tioning community  and  then  proceeds  to  survey 
several  contemporary  types  of  real  estate  enter- 
prise. His  examination  covers  the  recent  history 
of  their  development  and  goes  on  to  include  an 
analysis  of  their  str  icture  and  function,  which 
are  subsequently  compared  with  certain  societal 
principles  and  practices  found  in  supposedly 
primitive  communities. 

Mr.  MacCallum  forsees  a  radically  new  form 
of  society  based  on  voluntary  contracts  among 
individuals,  which  promises  to  transcend  present 
geographical,  political,  and  psychological  ob- 
stacles in  human  relationships.  In  depicting  the 
outlines  of  an  open  society  of  contract  and  show- 
ing how  it  already  seems  to  be  evolving,  he  closes 
the  gap  between  purely  theoretical  speculations 
and  the  specific  practices  that  produce  social 
harmony.  His  construct  preserves  private  own- 
ership and  control  of  property,  entirely  inde- 
pendent of  political  sanctions,  while  establishing 
methods  to  provide  services  so  often  preempted 
by  the  State.  He  shows  how  we  are  beginning  to 
move  away  from  the  political  regimentation  of 
life  and  toward  contractual,  voluntary  associa- 
tions which  fulfill  all  functions  needed  for  an 
orderly  and  creative  community. 


THE  AUTHOR 

Spencer  MacCallum  is  a  graduate  of  I 
Phillips  Academy  at  Andover,  Massa- 
chusetts, and  Princeton  University.  He  re- 
ceived his  Master  of  Arts  degree  in  social 
anthropology  at  the  T^iiiversity  of  Washing- 
ton and  has  pursued  additional  graduate! 
work  at  The  University  of  Chicago.  In  1956 
he  and  his  grandfather.  Spencer  Heath,i 
founded  The  Science  of  Society  Foundation,! 
which  brought  out  a  number  of  publications: 
including  Citadel,  Market  and  Altar.  Be- 
sides doing  his  own  advanced  study  and 
writing,  Mr.  MacCallum  has  been  active  in 
research  and  lecturing  for  both  academic 
and  business  clients.  He  has  recently  as^ 
sisted  the  Princeton  University  Art  Mu- 
seum as  consulting  anthropologist  and  is 
currently  working  with  A'vr  J  ^wi  &  Asso- 
ciates, of  Los  Angeles,  and  other  engineer- 
ing and  management  consulting  firms.